JP5660769B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, variable display means including a plurality of variable display units that variably display a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them and derive and display a display result. And a game machine that controls to a specific game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are paid out to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). In some cases, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the game can be controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player.

  In the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left, middle, and right symbols) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches the specific display result. It can be a big hit before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaling, or deforming, or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. A state in which sex continues is called a reach state. A game machine provided with a plurality of modes in which different effects (reach effects) are executed is also proposed. As a reach effect, what executes a predetermined effect (for example, an effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of a big hit) is also referred to as a super reach. In addition, a gaming machine in which an effect (notice effect) for notifying that there is a high possibility that a big hit or a reach (particularly super reach) will occur is executed separately from the reach effect.

  There has also been proposed a gaming machine in which a notice effect is executed when the identification information is in a reach state, and an effect in which the type of reach is switched is executed (for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, a game machine that executes a reach effect that develops a super reach after stopping specific identification information when a super reach is reached has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2001-347004 A JP 2003-340033 A

  In the gaming machines described in Patent Literature 1 and Patent Literature 2, the player's attention is given by suggesting that it develops into super reach by executing a notice effect during reach or by stopping specific identification information. I was attracted.

  However, by suggesting that it will develop into super reach before becoming super reach, the production may become redundant, and if it is determined that it will be super reach depending on the game situation, It was a useless production.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is improved by eliminating useless effects.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable display unit configured to variably display a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other (for example, a design symbol) and derive and display a display result. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the display means (for example, the effect display device 9). For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1), the identification information forms part of the specific display result in the variable display means, but the identification information is variably displayed in at least some of the variable display units. Reach effect execution means for executing a reach effect after reaching a certain reach state (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 101 executes the processing of steps S802 and S803). The reach effect executing means includes a first reach effect (for example, a reach effect for normal reach) and a second reach effect (for example, an effect during reach) executed after the first reach effect (for example, an effect during reach). At least a reach production α and a reach production β) of the super reach, and as the predetermined production, the variable display means temporarily stops the identification information with a non-specific display result that is not the specific display result. In a first development effect (for example, a development effect of “after temporary stop +1” or “after temporary stop −1”) that resumes variable display of the identification information of some of the variable display units, or in the variable display means A second development effect (e.g., a middle symbol is displayed in a variable display of the identification information of some of the variable display units without temporarily stopping the identification information in a non-specific display result that is not a specific display result. Development effect execution means for executing the effect of super reach without stopping) (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S802 based on the determination result in the development effect determination process of step S903), and the variable After the variable display of the identification information is started in the display unit, the identification information is displayed in all of the plurality of variable display units before reaching the reach state in which the reach production is executed by the reach production execution unit. Re-variable display execution means for executing re-variable display (for example, pseudo continuous fluctuation) for restarting variable display after temporarily stopping display with non-specific display results (for example, the rendering control CPU 101 executes “pseudo” in step S802. A portion for executing a specific effect of “ream”), and the reach effect executing means When the re-variable display is executed by the re-variable display executing means a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or more, the second reach effect is executed via the predetermined effect after the first reach effect (for example, As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the reach is always super reach when the quasi-continuous variation is 3 times), and the development effect executing means executes the revariable display more than a predetermined number of times by the revariable display executing means. The second development effect is executed as the predetermined effect (for example, the effect control CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S927 to S930 only when N is determined in step S925).
According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the second reach effect is to be executed, the first development effect is not executed, so that the useless effect can be omitted and the interest of the game is improved. .

It further comprises a pre-determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 56 executes the process of step S61) for determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state before the derivation display of the display result, When the decision means decides to control the specific gaming state, the first development effect is executed at a higher rate than when the prior decision means decides not to control the specific gaming state (for example, In the setting of the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 70, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio determined to execute the first development effect than when the variable display result is “losing”. May be high).
According to such a configuration, the player comes to pay attention to the development effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

It further includes a pre-determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 56 executes the process of step S61) for determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state before the derivation display of the display result, and the development effect executing means includes the first As the development effect, the first stop appearance development effect (for example, the development effect of “progression after temporary stop-1”) and the second stop appearance development effect different from the first stop appearance development effect (for example, “temporary stop”). And the first stop appearance development effect is designated as the second stop appearance. (For example, in the setting of the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 70, when the variable display result is “big hit”, “development after provisional stop + 1” rather than “development after provisional stop + 1”) 1 "pattern Are easily determined.) It may be.
According to such a structure, since the ratio which becomes a specific display result changes with the production | presentation aspects of a 1st development effect, a player comes to pay more attention to a 1st development effect and the interest of a game improves.

Prior determination means (for example, the part where the CPU 56 executes the process of step S61) for determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state before derivation display of the display result, and the display result of the variable display in the variable display means A notice effect execution means for executing a notice effect (for example, a notice during reach) for notifying that there is a possibility of a specific display result (for example, the effect control CPU 101 executes a step based on the determination result in the reach notice determination process during reach in step S901 A portion for executing the process of S802) and a notice effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect based on the determination result of the prior decision means (for example, the effect control CPU 101 performs the processes of steps S911 to S913). For executing the notice effect execution means, the development effect execution means is the first effect execution means. The notice effect is executed at a timing overlapping with the timing of executing the exhibition effect (for example, the advance notice during reach is executed at the same timing as the development effect as shown in FIGS. 114C and 114D). The execution means does not execute the first development effect when the notice effect is executed by the notice effect execution means (for example, if the effect control CPU 101 determines Y in step S902, the processing of step S903 is performed). In step S904, it may be determined that there is no development effect).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that there is a possibility that the notice effect is executed during the reach effect and the specific display result is obtained, and it is possible to prevent the effect from overlapping with the first development effect, and the content of the effect is It can be prevented from becoming unclear.

It further comprises a pre-determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 56 executes the process of step S61) for determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state before the derivation display of the display result, and the reach effect executing means is a display mode A plurality of types of the second reach effects (for example, reach effect α and reach effect β) can be executed, and the display mode of the second reach effect is executed at a different rate according to the determination result of the pre-decision means. (For example, the CPU 56 executes the process of step S301), and the development effect executing means uses a first stop appearance development effect (for example, the development effect of “development after temporary stop-1”) as the first development effect. And a second stop event development effect different from the first stop event development effect (for example, a development effect of “development after provisional stop + 1”). The first stop appearance development effect or the second stop appearance development effect is executed at a different rate according to the display mode of the second reach effect (for example, setting of the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 70) Then, the case of the reach effect α and the case of the reach effect β may be different from the determination ratio of the development effect pattern).
According to such a configuration, since the execution ratio of the display mode of the second reach effect differs depending on the content of the first development effect, the player comes to pay attention to the first development effect, and the interest of the game is improved. To do.

Based on the pre-determining means (for example, the part where the CPU 56 executes the process of step S61) for determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state before the derivation display of the display result, and the determination result of the pre-determining means, As a notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of the specific display result, a notice effect in which the effect changes in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, four stages) according to a predetermined system (for example, FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 4, the notice effects A to D change in stages, and when the specific display result is obtained, the effect changes to a predetermined stage at a higher rate than the case where the specific display result is not obtained. Step-up notice effect determining means for determining to which step the step-up notice effect (for example, the first step-up notice effect) is executed is to be executed. For example, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the part for executing the notice effect setting process in step S517) and the step up notice effect executing means for executing the step up notice effect determined by the step up notice effect determining means (for example, , A portion for executing the processing of steps S846 to S855 in the effect control microcomputer 100), and the step-up notice effect determining means executes the step-up notice effect (for example, Y in step S573). ), A normal step-up (for example, main step-up shown in FIG. 73) in which the effects (for example, notice effects A to D) change in a stepwise manner in a predetermined normal system, or a predetermined step (for example, the first step). Or until the second stage) The output changes stepwise in a branch system that changes to an output (for example, the notice effect E or the notice effect G) after the predetermined stage. Whether the branch step-up (for example, the first branch step-up shown in FIG. 74 or the second branch step-up shown in FIGS. 75 and 76) and the number of stages (for example, the number of steps) of the step-up change are notified in advance. Step-up effect mode determining means (for example, effect control) that determines a step-up effect mode by determining based on data for determination (for example, data set in the first notice setting table shown in FIGS. 83 to 88). For executing the processing of steps S574 and S575 in the microcomputer 100) The effect execution means executes a notice effect during the period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the first temporary stop display during the execution of the variable display of the identification information and the period during the re-variable display (for example, As shown in FIG. 104, during the period in which the identification information is variably displayed (including re-variable display), the step-up notice effect is executed), and the notice determination data is the first time from the start of the variable display of the identification information. In the case of determining the branch step-up as the step-up notice effect executed in one of the period until the temporary stop display or the period during the re-variable display, the next time in the one period As the step-up notice effect executed in the period during the re-variable display, the branch step-up is not determined as the step-up notice effect executed in the one period. The ratio for determining the branch step-up is set to be higher than the case (for example, as shown in the first notice setting table shown in FIG. 87, the branch step-up notice effect E, When F is executed, the branch step-up notice effects E and F are not executed at the time of the first change (that is, step B which is the normal step-up notice effect is executed at the time of the first change). ) May be set so that the ratio at which the branch step-up notice effects E and F are executed at the time of the second fluctuation is higher).
According to such a configuration, once it is decided to branch up, it will be easy to decide on branch step up thereafter, so that the re-variable display becomes easy to understand, and does not confuse the player and improve the game entertainment. Can do.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of operation | movement of a movable member. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a jackpot determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage specific information storage area (holding specific area). It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display operation in the variable display of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the aspect of the variable display of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a left-right output determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a promotion production execution decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a design fluctuation control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data holding area for production control. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the reach setting process during reach. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice determination process during reach. It is a flowchart which shows an expansion production | presentation determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the advance notice determination table during reach, and the advance notice pattern determination table during reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows an expansion production | presentation determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation performed according to the content of a process table. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 1st step-up notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 1st step-up notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 1st step-up notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 1st step-up notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 1st step-up notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 1st step-up notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows each notification effect in a 2nd step-up notification. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a notice classification selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reliability of jackpot when the predetermined notice effect is performed in the first step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reliability of jackpot when the predetermined notice effect is performed in the first step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mail notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mail message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mail message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mail message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a card notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a card message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a card message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a card message determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable object step-up notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for selecting a frame advance notice effect, a production | presentation blade accessory notice effect, and another system liquid crystal notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mini character notice setting table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a timing diagram which shows the execution timing of various notice effects. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in case notice effect AD is performed as a 1st step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case notice effect AD is performed as a 1st step-up notice. It is a timing diagram which shows a notice timing when notice effects A, E, and F are performed as the first step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case notification effect A, E, and F are performed as 1st step-up notice. It is a timing chart showing notice timing when notice effects A, B, G, and H are executed as the first step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case notification effect A, B, G, H is performed as a 1st step-up notice. It is a timing chart showing notice timing when notice effects A, B, G, and I are executed as the first step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case notice effect A, B, G, I is performed as 1st step-up notice. It is a timing diagram showing the execution timing of the effect during reach and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific example, such as a case where production during reach is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case an advance notice during reach is performed as an effect during reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case a pseudo | simulation continuous variation is performed 3 times.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The square display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. In the effect symbol display area, there are symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) , A state where the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying a display result is to stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information) (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). In this embodiment, the variable display start condition is established in the order in which the start prizes are generated regardless of the prizes in the first start prize slot 13 and the second start prize slot 14. The variable display start condition may be established by giving priority to one of winning in the winning opening 13 and winning in the second start winning opening 14. For example, when giving priority to winning in the first start winning opening 13, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed. For example, even when the second reserved memory number is not zero, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed until the first reserved memory number becomes zero.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (design) symbol is performed. A first decorative symbol display 9a is provided. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a is composed of two LEDs. The first decorative symbol display 9a is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display of the second decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) is performed. There is provided a second decorative symbol display 9b. The second decorative symbol display 9b is composed of two LEDs. The second decorative symbol display 9b is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol display. .

  The variation of the decorative pattern (variable display) is realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display 9a are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display 9b. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit. When the big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the big-hit on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit. The functions of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be realized by the effect display device 9. That is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first decorative symbol display 9a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the starting memory or the starting prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second decorative symbol display 9b is a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, an area for displaying the total number (total number of reserved storage) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved memory display unit 18c). Is provided). Since the summation pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In addition, since the 1st special symbol holding | maintenance memory | storage display 18a and the 2nd special symbol holding | maintenance memory | storage display 18b are provided, the total reservation memory | storage display part 18c does not necessarily need to be provided.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R provided in the effect display device 9, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and In response to the start of any one of the special figure games using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b, variable display of the decorative symbols is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means that the decorative symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 form part of the jackpot combination continue to fluctuate. Or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 9L and 9R, etc.) The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the effect display device 9 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 27, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the LED 25 and the frame LED 28, etc. before reaching the reach state. An operation mode different from the operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach forms such as a normal reach for executing a “normal” reach effect, a super reach α for executing a “reach effect α”, and a super reach β for executing a “reach effect β” are set in advance. ing. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (big hit reliability) Becomes higher.

  In addition, there is a case where the effect during reach is executed in the variable display that becomes super reach. In this embodiment, the advance notice during the reach and the development effect can be executed as the effect during reach. The advance notice during reach is an effect for giving a notice that the game will become super reach by displaying a predetermined character image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 at a predetermined timing during variable display for super reach. In the development effect, after the variable display is started and the normal reach reach effect is executed, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and then all the effect symbol display areas 9L. , 9C, 9R is an effect that makes it appear as if it has evolved from normal reach to super reach by changing the effect symbol again (pseudo-continuous change) and executing the reach effect of super reach. In this embodiment, a plurality of patterns (learning advance notice patterns) are prepared as reach notices. In addition, a plurality of patterns are prepared as development effects. An effect other than these may be executed as an effect during reach.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect or a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as an effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates is provided below the left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. In this embodiment, the production blade actors 79a and 79b operate when a notice production (production blade production notice production) is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state where the probability of being determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 Opening time and opening times are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display 9a. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol display 9b displays variable display of the second decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when it is informed that it is a probable big hit or a probable promotion effect (a special effect indicating promotion to a probable state), the gaming state is shifted to a high probability state. At the same time, the game ball is controlled to be in a high base state that is controlled so as to make it easier for the game ball to start and win (that is, the execution conditions for variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established). Transition. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 is a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is won increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. (In other words, the digestion of the stored memory becomes faster), and as a result, it is easier to start a winning and the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Upon receiving the effect control command, display control is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 9a and the second decorative symbol display device 9b that variably display the decorative symbol, and the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbol.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, an electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the operation of the movable member. In the example shown in FIG. 4, the operation of the movable member 78 when the re-change effect (pseudo-continuous effect) in the effect display device 9 is executed is shown. In the re-change effect, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the change of the effect symbol is started from the state shown in FIG. 4A (the state in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols are stopped) (FIG. 4). (Refer to (B) and (C)), when the predetermined period elapses, the left, middle and right effect symbols are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 4D). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol re-varies (see FIG. 4E), and when the predetermined re-variation period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol is finally stopped (confirmed). (See FIG. 4F). In the example shown in FIG. 4, the movable member 78 operates (operates so as to return to the original position (outside the display screen) after entering the display screen of the effect display device 9) during the first variation period, and the first variation occurs. The movable member 78 also operates during the subsequent re-variation period. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 4 is an example when one temporary stop is performed. Then, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle, and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). Here, it has been described that reach is reached when the re-variation effect ends, but when the re-change effect ends, the effect symbol may not be reached but may finally stop.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM 55 is accessible. (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command (power failure recovery 1 designation command) as an initialization command at the time of power supply restoration to the effect control board 80 (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 55 (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, an initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the effect control board 80 (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized. Display, that is, initialization notification. In the initialization process, the CPU 56 also transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation (demonstration) command.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S15). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern or the like, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. . The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination or the like is one round (minimum value that can be taken by random numbers) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power monitoring circuit 920 mounted on the power board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determining a normal winning symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control is performed in accordance with winning detection based on any one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b Variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag relating to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. If the speed is high, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  In this embodiment, during the variable display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production, the variable display state of the production symbol may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be “big hit” There is a case where a specific effect for informing the player that there is a variable display mode of the effect symbol is executed. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “sliding”, “pseudo-continuous”, “intro”, “development opportunity”, and “end of development opportunity” are set to be executable.

  In the “slip” specific effect, the effect symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then two or more effect symbol display areas ( For example, after the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “1” or “ 2 ”) in the effect symbol display area (for example, one or both of the“ left ”effect symbol display area 9L and the“ right ”effect symbol display area 9R). Thus, effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped is performed. Here, the temporary stop display is a stop of the effect symbol that is performed before the fixed effect symbol is stopped and displayed (final stop display) because a variation time determined for each of a plurality of types of variation patterns to be described later has elapsed. Refers to the display. In the temporary stop display, while the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display or changing the effect symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the produced design symbol is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the effect symbol may be re-fluctuated after the effect symbol is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbols are displayed based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special game is established once. After changing the effect symbols in all of the areas 9L, 9C, 9R, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and then all the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C. 9R, the effect display for changing the effect symbol again (pseudo continuous fluctuation) can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo ream”, the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 7A in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. The effect symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” is an effect symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L, and the “middle symbol” is displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C. The “right symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination.

  In the specific effect of “Intro”, the effect symbols are changed in all the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then all effect symbol display areas 9L, Before the confirmed effect symbol is stopped and displayed at 9C and 9R (final stop display), for example, a predetermined effect display such as an introduction portion of the effect display performed in the reach effect is performed.

  In the specific effect of “Development Opportunity”, the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are changed in all the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then all effect symbol display areas are displayed. In 9L, 9C, and 9R, after the effect symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, the predetermined reach effect is started with the variable display state of the effect symbols as the reach state. The As an example, in the specific development of “Development Chance”, the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 7B are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” production symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. The effect symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, when any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the production symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The expectation of the player is raised.

  In the specific effect of “end of development chance”, the effect symbols are changed in all the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then all effect symbols are displayed. In the areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, an effect display is performed in which an effect symbol of a predetermined combination as a development opportunity is stopped and displayed as a final effect symbol (final stop display). As an example, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of “development opportunity” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol.

  Furthermore, during the variable display of the effect symbol, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, by displaying a display pattern other than the variable display mode of the effect symbol, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image, A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. In this embodiment, a notice effect such as “step-up notice” and “mail display” is set to be executable.

  In the “step-up notice” notice effect, the effect symbols are changed in all the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then two or more effect symbols are displayed. Before the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display area, an effect display for switching and displaying a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order may be performed in the display area of the effect display device 9. . In the notice effect of “step-up notice”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched.

  In the “mail display” notice effect, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then two or more effect symbols are displayed. Before the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the area, the effect operation changes such as changing the display of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 in response to the operation button 120 being operated by the player. An effect display is performed.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, after the variable display of the production symbol is started, the variable display state of the production symbol does not become the reach state, but the predetermined design. There is a case where the confirmed effect symbol that becomes one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 in the special combination is stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the variable symbol display state has reached the reach state after the variable symbol symbol display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, a confirmed effect symbol that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special big win symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol that becomes a 15-round big hit symbol as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the variable display state of the production symbol has reached the reach state After the reach effect is executed, the determined effect symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed effect symbol which is a normal big hit combination is, for example, a symbol number variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R of the “left”, “middle” and “right” in the effect display device 9. Among the production symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the production symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in each of the “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. In this way, the effect symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the variable symbol display mode of the effect symbol in which the confirmed bonus symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is This is referred to as “normal” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the time reduction state or the normal state. Become.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the probability variable big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that become the 15-round big-hit symbol, the production symbol is displayed in correspondence with the variable display state becoming the reach state. After the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the symbol is “normal” is executed, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed effect symbol that is a probable big hit combination is, for example, a symbol number that is variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9. Among the effect symbols of “1” to “8”, any one of the effect symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” are “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in each of the “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. The effect symbols whose odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are called probability variation symbols. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the probable big hit symbol, after the reach production similar to the case where the variable display mode of the production symbol is “normal” is executed, the probable big jackpot combination is decided. The variable display mode of the production symbol in which the production symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “first probability variation” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “first positive change”, the game is controlled to the 15th round big hit state, and when the 15th round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. .

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that become the 15 round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the production symbol is changed corresponding to the reach state. After a reach effect different from the case where the display mode is “normal” is executed, a confirmed effect symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after a reach production different from the case where the variable display mode of the production symbol is “normal” is executed, The variable display mode of the production symbol in which the finalized design symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “second probability variation” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “second positive change”, the control is made to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, the variable change state is controlled to the positive change state. .

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the probability variable big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that become the 15-round big-hit symbol, the production symbol is displayed in correspondence with the variable display state becoming the reach state. After the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the symbol is “normal” is executed, the fixed effect symbol of the normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach production similar to the case where the variable display mode of the production symbol is “normal” is executed, The variable display mode of the effect symbol in which the confirmed effect symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “third probability change” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability change”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. .

  As described above, when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the fixed effect symbol that is the probability variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed by variable display of the effect symbol. , It is determined that the probability change state is reached after being controlled to the 15 round big hit state. On the other hand, when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “third probability variation”, the final effect that is a normal jackpot combination in the variable display of the effect symbol is the same as when the variable display mode is “normal”. The symbol is stopped and displayed. For this reason, when the variable display mode is “third probability variation”, the player cannot recognize whether or not the probability variation state is obtained from the variable display result of the effect symbol. In other words, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the probability variation jackpot combination is included in the specific display result that is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is included in the special display result that is determined to be controlled to the probability variation state. On the other hand, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is included in the specific display result other than the special display result that is not determined to be controlled to the probability variation state.

  In the special figure game, if the probability variable big win symbol is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that become the 15 round big hit symbol, the variable symbol display state of the production symbol is changed to the reach state. After the reach effect and the roulette chance effect are executed, the predetermined effect pattern that is the predetermined reach-losing combination is stopped or displayed, or after the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the predetermined non-reach combination May be displayed in a stopped state, or the variable display state of the effect symbol may not be in a reach state, and various confirmed effect symbols may be displayed in a stopped state. Note that the chances of success TC <b> 1 to TC <b> 4 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a probable big hit symbol, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. The variable display mode of the effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “fourth probability variation” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “fourth probability change”, it is controlled to the rush appearance 15 round big hit state, and when the rush appearance 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability change state. Will be.

  When the special symbol indicating the number of “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the production symbol corresponds to the reach state. After the “normal” reach effect is executed, or after the “normal” reach effect and roulette chance effect are executed, the fixed effect symbol that is the predetermined reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, After the specific effect is executed, or the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, the fixed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped or displayed, or the variable display state of the effect symbol Is not in a reach state, the finalized design symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 7 determined performance symbol to be one of 突確 chance th TC1~TC4 shown in (C) may appear stopped. Note that the chances of success TC <b> 1 to TC <b> 4 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the effect symbols in which various confirmed effect symbols are stopped and displayed. Is referred to as a variable display mode of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, the probability change state is controlled.

  As described above, when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “fourth probability variation”, the confirmed effect symbol that is one of the probability chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. After a “normal” reach effect and a roulette chance effect are executed, a confirmed effect pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination is stopped and displayed, and after a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, a predetermined non-reach combination is confirmed The production symbol may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “accuracy”, the definite effect symbol that is one of the accuracy chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed, and the “normal” reach effect and the roulette chance effect are executed. In some cases, a confirmed effect design that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination is stopped and displayed, and a specific effect design that becomes a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed after the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. For this reason, when a fixed effect symbol that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in a variable display of the effect symbol, or after a “normal” reach effect and a roulette chance effect are executed, a predetermined reach lose combination If the confirmed effect symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed after the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the game is controlled to a sudden appearance 15 round big hit state. The player cannot recognize from the variable display result of the effect design whether it is controlled to the big hit state of 2 rounds.

  Here, the confirmed effect symbol that is one of the odd chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 7C is stopped and displayed only when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “surprise” and “fourth probability change”. . In other words, when the finalized design symbol that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the production symbol, the variable display result is “ It will be decided that it will be a big hit.

  When the variable display mode of the effect symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation”, and “third probability variation”, during the variable display of the effect symbol, There is a case where a promotion effect during change as a specific change display is executed. In the fluctuating promotion effect, the effect symbol which is normally a big hit combination is temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R of the “left”, “middle” and “right” on the effect display device 9. After that, for example, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are varied again in a state where the same effect symbols are aligned, and an effect symbol that becomes a probable big hit combination, Any of the effect symbols that are normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final effect symbol (final stop display). Here, when the changing promotion effect is executed corresponding to the fact that the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” or “third probability change”, the temporarily changing display is performed as the changing promotion effect. After changing the effect symbol again, a promotion promotion failure effect during change is performed in which the confirmed effect symbol that is normally a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the variable display mode being “first probability change”, the temporarily stopped display effect design is changed again as the changing promotion effect. After the change, the promotion effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed effect symbol which becomes the probability variation big hit combination.

  When the variable display result of the variable display result is “big hit”, if the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” or “third probability change”, the variable display result is stopped and displayed for 15 rounds of big hit status After the control, the jackpot promotion effect is executed as a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probable change state during the period until the 15 round big hit state is finished. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the start of the first round in the 15 round big hit state after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. A period from the end of the last round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game may be used. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or effect symbol after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the game state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed effect pattern is usually a jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9, and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable change symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette enters the “even number” in the big hit promotion promotion effect and displays the effect image of “Sorry!”, While the successful promotion to the big hit hits the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd number” and the effect image “probability!” Is displayed. In response to the special symbol indicating the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability variation”. By executing the success promotion effect during the big hit before the big hit gaming state is finished, it is notified that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state. Corresponding to the special symbol showing the number “3” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special figure game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, By the time the gaming state ends, the success promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, and there is no notification that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing variations in the presentation symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of the presentation symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a pattern. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7 and non-reach PB1- are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the production symbol is “reach”, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-10, super PB3-1 to super PB3— 6. Variation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, super PA4-1 to super PA4 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the effect symbol is “big hit”. -10, Super PA5-1 to Super PA5-5, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-5, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-5, Super PC4-1 and Super PC4-2, Super PD1-1 and Super PD1 -2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1-2, Super PF1-1 to Super PF1-3, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-6, Special PG2-1, Special PG2-2, Special PG3-1 to Special PG3 -3, special PH1-3 to special PH1-5, special PH3-1 to special PH3-3 variation patterns are available .

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 103 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of effect symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 11 is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 11 is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. The numerical values described in FIG. 11 are jackpot determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). If it matches the big hit determination value, it is decided to make a big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit or sudden big hit) for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes a jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type determination table 131 sets the variable symbol display mode of the effect symbol as “normal” and “first probability change” based on the random number value for determining the big hit type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “fourth probability variation” and “surprise accuracy”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 23 is “1” or “2”. Correspondingly, the random number value for determining the big hit type is composed of determination data assigned to the big hit types of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, and “surprise probability”. Further, the jackpot type determination table 131 uses the jackpot type buffer value (hit type buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 23 as the jackpot type determined based on the random number value for determining the jackpot type. Table data (setting data) for setting to any one of “00” to “05” corresponding to the type may be included.

  Here, in the setting of the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 12, depending on whether the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the big hit of “fourth probability variation” and “surprise probability” The assignment of the random value for determining the jackpot type to the type is different. That is, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, “82” is assigned to the big hit type of “fourth probable change” among the random numbers for jackpot type determination, and “83” to “100”. If the value of the range is assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type and the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the jackpot type for the “fourth odds” and “surprise” jackpot types A random number for judgment is not assigned. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a is satisfied. And a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is satisfied. Thus, the ratio of determining the big hit type as “fourth probability variation” or “surprising accuracy” can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M shown in FIGS. 13 (A) to (G) and FIGS. 14 (A) to (E). When the determination that the variable display result is “big hit” is made, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M change the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the big hit type for the variation pattern type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M corresponds to, for example, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state in accordance with the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Depending on the determination result of the jackpot type and the total number of reserved storage, it is selected as a use table. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M has a variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, or “surprise probability”. The random number MR3 for determination is changed to normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, special CA4-1 to special CA4-3, special CA5-1, special CA5. -2, decision data to be assigned to any of the variation pattern types of special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CB5-1, special CC4-1 to special CC4-3, special CC5-1, special CC5-2, etc. It is composed of

  Here, as an example, if attention is paid to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the big hit shown in FIG. 13A used when the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”. The variation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the variation pattern type determination table 132B for use of the big hit shown in FIG. 13B used when the big hit type is “first probability change” include normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. The allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the variation pattern type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3 is assigned. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type -4. In this way, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the variation pattern type determination table for big hit that is selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state 132A to 132E (selected in the normal state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132F to 132J (selected in the probability variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132F to 132H, 132K, 132M (short-time state) (When selected) are compared with each other, the allocation of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type differs depending on the jackpot type, and also varies for different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. A random value MR3 for pattern type determination is assigned. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132I, and 132K used when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, for example, special CA5-1, special CA5-2, special CB5-1, and special CC5-1. When the jackpot type is other than “fourth probable variation”, such as special CC5-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is compared with the variation pattern type to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned. Is assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, when controlling to the 15 round round big hit state, when controlling to the 15 round big hit state, The variation pattern type can be determined differently from the case of controlling to the state.

  In the setting of the variation pattern type determination table 132D for big hits used when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the variation corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “4” Corresponding to the case where all of the random numbers MR3 for pattern type determination are assigned to the variation pattern type of special CA5-1, while the total number of reserved storages is any one of “5” to “8”. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is all assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CA5-2. For this reason, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the total number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”). If there is, the variation pattern type of the special CA 5-1 is determined. On the other hand, if the total number of reserved storage is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the variation pattern type of the special CA 5-2 is determined.

  Further, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I, even when the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “8”, the variation pattern type of the special CB5-1 is changed to the variation pattern type determination variation. All of the numerical values MR3 are assigned. For this reason, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probable change”, the total number of reserved storage is any of “0” to “8”. Even if it exists, the variation pattern type of special CB5-1 is determined.

  In the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132K, all of the random numbers MR3 for variation pattern type determination correspond to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”. While allotted to the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-1, the random number MR 3 for variation pattern type determination is all corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”. Is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC5-2. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time state and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the total number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”). If there is, the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-1 is determined. On the other hand, if the total reserved storage number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-2 is determined.

  Furthermore, in the setting of the variation pattern type determination table 132E for big hits used when the big hit type is “surprise”, the change corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “4” Among the random values MR3 for pattern type determination, values in the range of “1” to “200” are assigned to the variation pattern types of the special CA4-1, while values in the range of “201” to “241”. Is assigned to the variation pattern type of special CA4-2. On the other hand, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is any one of “5” to “8”, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is in the range of “1” to “180”. While the value is assigned to the variation pattern type of special CA4-1, the value in the range of “181” to “241” is assigned to the variation pattern type of special CA4-3. For this reason, when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time state and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the total number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”). On the other hand, if one of the variation pattern types of special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 is determined, and the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the variation pattern of either special CA4-1 or special CA4-3 The type will be determined. In addition, with such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “5”) or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 is smaller than when the total number is less than the predetermined number. Lower.

  Further, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132J used when the big hit type is “surprise”, even when the total number of stored storage is “0” to “8”, the fluctuation pattern type determination Among the random number values MR3 for use, values in the range of “1” to “150” are assigned to the variation pattern types of the special CB4-1, while values in the range of “151” to “241” are the special CB4. -2 variation pattern type. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable change state, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the total number of stored storage is any of “0” to “8”. Also, the variation pattern type of either the special CB4-1 or the special CB4-2 is determined.

  Then, in the setting of the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132M, in response to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”, among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination, “ The value in the range of “1” to “175” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC4-1, while the value in the range of “176” to “241” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC4-2. ing. On the other hand, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is any one of “5” to “8”, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is in the range of “1” to “150”. While the value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1, the value in the range of “151” to “241” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-3. For this reason, when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the short-time state and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, if the total number of reserved storage is less than a predetermined number (eg, “5”) On the other hand, if any of the variation patterns of the special CC 4-1 and the special CC 4-2 is determined, and the total number of reserved storage is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the variation pattern of either the special CC 4-1 or the special CC 4-3 The type will be determined. In addition, with such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “5”), the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the special CC4-1 is smaller than when the total number is less than the predetermined number. Lower.

  As another example, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132E, 132J, and 132M used when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2 , Special CA4-3, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, special CC4-2, special CC4-3, the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is other than "surprise" In this case, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the type of big hit is “surprise”, the control is made to the round two big hit state, the case of controlling to the round 15 big hit state or the sudden appearance fake 15 round big hit state, Can be determined for different variation pattern types.

  As another example, if attention is paid to the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “normal”, the jackpot shown in FIG. 13 (A) used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. In the variation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the variation pattern type determination table 132F for jackpot shown in FIG. 13 (F) used when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the variation pattern of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 The assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F, the super CA3. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. In this way, paying attention to the case where the jackpot type is determined as one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, or “surprise probability”, it is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132F (selected when “normal” or “third probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132G (selected when “first probability variation”), Big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C, 132H (selected when “second probability variation”), big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, 132I (selected when “fourth probability variation”), big hit variation pattern type determination Comparing the tables 132E, 132J, and 132M (selected when “probable”) with each other, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normal or short The allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type is different depending on whether it is the probability variation state or the like, and the variation pattern type is different for the variation pattern type depending on the gaming state. A random number value MR3 for determination may be assigned. This makes it possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and is determined to be the same variation pattern type. The ratio can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. The reach determination tables 134 </ b> A to 134 </ b> C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “losing” based on the random number value for reach determination. This table is referred to for determination. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C is used depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C represent random numbers for reach determination as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1. -2 is a determination result assigned to any one of the determination results indicating that the reach state is not reached, such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1, or the like. It is composed of

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 15 (A), “1” to “204” among the random numbers for reach determination, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to a determination result of reach HA 2-1 while a value in the range of “2” is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA 1-1. Corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. Is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-2. Further, the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “2” or “3”. More values in the range of “1” to “220” are assigned to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “4” or any one of “5” to “8”, non-reach HA 1-1-1 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random numbers assigned to each of the non-reach HA1-3 determination results, is assigned to the non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5 determination results. With such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “4”), it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach”, the total When the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is the reach state. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table in accordance with a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a usage table according to the determination results of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B according to the determination result of the reach HB2-1. Is selected as the usage table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result of the reach HC2-1. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach state is reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is composed of data for determination assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Has been.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 16A, “1” to “1” of the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. A value in the range of “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, while other random values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 in the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. Further, according to the determination result of reach HA2-3, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1 among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. The determination result of the reach HA 2-1 is that a reach determination random number value is assigned in accordance with the setting of the reach determination table 134 A shown in FIG. Yes. The determination result of the reach HA 2-2 is assigned the random value MR2-2 for reach determination corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1” or “2” or “3”. It has been. The determination result of the reach HA2-3 is assigned by the random number value MR2-2 for reach determination corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “4” or any of “5” to “8”. It has been. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1”) or more, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state, the variation pattern type is determined based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C include non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, and non-reach HC1-2. It is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA 1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-. 3. It is comprised from the data for determination etc. which are allocated to one of the variation pattern types of non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  The determination tables stored in the ROM include hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D shown in FIGS. 18, 19A and 19B, and FIG. When the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D determine that the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern is determined for the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR4. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, and the variation pattern type is super CB3. -1 to Super CB3-5, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table according to the determination result, and the variation pattern types are special CA4-1 to special CA4-3, special CB4-1, The hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2 and the special CC4-1 to the special CC4-3 is used, and the variation pattern type is the special CA5-1 or the special CA5-. 2, Special CB5-1, Special CC5-1, Special CC5-2 Per variation pattern determination table 137D according to the determination result to the effect that is selected as the usage table. Each of the winning variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D includes a random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the effect symbol is “big hit”. It consists of decision data to be assigned to either.

  Here, in the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. 18, "normal" reach effects such as normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 are provided corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern to be executed. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of super CA 3-2, a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α such as super PA4-1 to super PA4-10. ing. Corresponding to the variation pattern types of Super CA3-3 and Super CA3-4, reach effects β such as Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-5, Super PC4-1, Super PD1-1, and Super PD1-2 are set. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern to be executed. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA 3-5, random number value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern for executing reach effect α such as super PA5-1 to super PA5-5. Yes. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-6, the variation pattern is changed to the variation pattern that executes the effect of determining the probability variation big hit such as Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-5, Super PE1-1, Super PE1-2. A random number value MR4 for determination is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-7, a random value for variation pattern determination is added to the variation pattern that executes the “development chance” specific effects such as Super PC 4-1 and Super PC 4-2. MR4 is assigned. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-8, the variation pattern changes to a variation pattern that executes reach effect β such as PF1-1 and a variation pattern that executes effect of roulette chance such as PF1-2 and PF1-3. A random number MR4 for pattern determination is assigned.

  Further, in the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137B shown in FIG. 19A, the reach effect β such as the super PB4-1 to the super PB4-5 is executed corresponding to the case where the change pattern type is the super CB3-1. The random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-2, the variation pattern determining random number value for executing the reach effect β and the roulette effect such as the super PD 1-1 and the super PD 1-2. MR4 is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-3, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β such as the super PB5-1 to the super PB5-5. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CB 3-4, random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern for executing reach effect β such as super PC 4-1 and super PC 4-2. Yes. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-5, the variation pattern determination random number MR4 is included in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β and the roulette effect such as the super PE 1-1 and the super PE 1-2. Assigned.

  With such a setting, for example, referring to the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, whether the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1 or other variation pattern types. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the “normal” reach effect. When the variation pattern type of normal CA3-1 is determined, one of the variation patterns of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 is referred to with reference to the hit variation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific effect of “slip”.

  In addition, as a variation pattern type other than the normal CA 3-1, for example, when the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-2 is determined, referring to the hit variation pattern determination table 137 A shown in FIG. By determining one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA 4-10, whether or not to execute a specific effect, whether to execute a specific effect of “slip”, “pseudo-run”, or “intro”, for example, It is possible to determine the type of the specific effect such as the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation in the specific effect of the “pseudo train”.

  However, when the jackpot type is “second probability change”, for example, a specific effect of “Development Chance Eye” is executed in order to cause a certain probability change jackpot appearance to appear at a certain rate regardless of the type of reach effect. Variation pattern types (for example, variation pattern types of super CA 3-7 and super CB 3-4) are provided.

  In the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137C shown in FIG. 19B, special PG1-1, special PG1-2, special PG1-6, special PG2 corresponding to the case where the fluctuation pattern type is special CA4-1. The random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern such as −1 and special PG2-2. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of special CA4-2, the variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all revariable display operations such as special PG1-3 are performed twice, or special PG1- When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, such as a fluctuation pattern such as 4 or a fluctuation pattern such as special PG 3-1 PG1 TC4. The random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern used only for the variation pattern. On the other hand, corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of special CA 4-3, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all re-variable display operations such as special PG 1-5 are performed, Fluctuations that are used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, such as a fluctuation pattern for stopping and displaying an effect symbol that is one of the special chance items TC1 to TC4 such as special PG3-1 A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CB4-1, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern such as the special PG2-1. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CB4-2, the roulette chance effect for selecting the effect that develops later, such as the special PG3-2 and the special PG3-3, is executed and developed. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for selecting a stunning effect as an effect. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1, the variation pattern determination is performed on the variation patterns such as the special PG 1-1, the special PG 1-2, the special PG 1-6, the special PG 2-1, and the special PG 2-2. Is assigned a random value MR4. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CC4-2, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all revariable display operations such as the special PG1-3 are performed twice, a special PG1-4, etc. Used only when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "surprise", such as a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern that stops and displays an effect symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 such as special PG3-1 The random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern to be performed. On the other hand, in response to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-3, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all re-variable display operations such as the special PG 1-5 are performed, Fluctuations that are used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, such as a fluctuation pattern for stopping and displaying an effect symbol that is one of the special chance items TC1 to TC4 such as special PG3-1 A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern.

  Further, in the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137D shown in FIG. 20, the “pseudo-continuous display operation” in which the total re-change display operation such as the special PH1-3 is performed twice corresponding to the case of the special CA5-1 fluctuation pattern type. ”For a variation pattern for executing a specific effect, a variation pattern such as a special PH1-4, and a variation pattern for stopping and displaying an effect symbol that is one of the odd chances TC1 to TC4 such as a special PH3-1. The numerical value MR4 is assigned. On the other hand, corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of special CA5-2, the variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all re-variable display operations such as special PH1-5 are performed, A random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for stopping and displaying the effect symbol which is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 such as the special PH 3-1. In addition, in response to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CB5-1, a roulette chance effect such as a special PH 3-2 and a special PH 3-3 for selecting an effect that develops later from a plurality of types is executed, A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for selecting a surprise effect as an effect to be developed. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-1 is selected, a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which the entire re-variable display operation such as the special PH1-3 is performed twice, a special PH1-4, etc. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern that stops and displays the effect pattern that is one of the chance patterns TC1 to TC4 such as the variation pattern and the special PH3-1. On the other hand, in response to the case of the variation pattern type of the special CC 5-2, the variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which all re-variable display operations such as the special PH 1-5 are performed, A random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for stopping and displaying the effect symbol which is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 such as the special PH 3-1.

  Here, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, the variation pattern type is determined from the gaming state and the total number of reserved storage. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the ratio that varies depending on the gaming state and the total number of reserved memories by assigning the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type Thus, one of a plurality of variation pattern types used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” is determined. Here, in the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, roulette chance effect, Any of the effects developed from the temporary stop display of the effect symbol that is one of the chances TC1 to TC4 is executed.

  With such setting, for example, referring to the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132E, and 132I to 132M shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, after determining the variation pattern type corresponding to the total number of reserved storage, FIG. With reference to the hit variation pattern determination tables 137C and 137D shown in (B), by determining the variation pattern, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, and to store the total hold Corresponding to the number, the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation can be determined. That is, in the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”, when it is determined to execute the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, 2 is determined as the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation. Is done. On the other hand, when the total number of reserved memories is “5” to “8” and the execution of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is determined, the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation is 1 Times are determined.

  Here, the appearance of the fluctuation pattern determined with reference to the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137C shown in FIG. 19B and the fluctuation pattern determined with reference to the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137D shown in FIG. The production operations having the same production mode are executed. That is, the variation pattern of the special PHl-3 has the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special PGl-3. Specifically, after the total re-variation display operation is executed twice, the effect design that becomes a non-reach combination is temporarily stopped. Display, and then start a stunning presentation. The variation pattern of the special PHI-4 has the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special PG1-4, specifically, temporarily displays an effect symbol that is a non-reach combination, and then starts a stunning effect. The variation pattern of special PH1-5 is the same as the variation pattern of special PG1-5. Specifically, after the re-variation display operation is executed once, the effect design that becomes a non-reach combination is displayed temporarily. Then, the stunning production is started. The variation pattern of the special PH 3-1 has the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special PG 3-1, and specifically, an effect design that becomes one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the variation display. Is temporarily stopped, and then a stunning effect is started. The variation pattern of the special PH 3-2 has the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special PG 3-2. Specifically, after the start of the variation display, the specific representation is not executed and the reach state is reached. A roulette chance effect that is selected from a plurality of types is executed, an ascending effect is selected as an effect that develops, and then an astonishing effect is started. The variation pattern of the special PH 3-3 is the same as the variation pattern of the special PG 3-3. Specifically, the variation state of the special PH 3-3 is reached after a specific effect of “slip” is executed after the start of the variation display, and then developed. A roulette chance effect that selects an effect to be performed from among a plurality of types is executed, an astonishing effect is selected as an effect that develops, and then an astonishing effect is started.

  Further, in FIG. 19B, setting of the variation pattern type used only when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” in the hit variation pattern determination table 137C shown in FIG. In the setting of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137D shown, the range of the random value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern assigned to the fluctuation pattern in which the visual effect mode performs the same effect operation is the same. That is, in the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137C, the special hit CA4 is selected when the big hit type is determined as “surprise” during the normal state and the total number of reserved storage is “0” to “4”. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of -2, among the variation pattern determination random value MR4, a value in the range of "1" to "45" is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PGl-3, and "46" to "101" The value in the range “” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG1-4, and the value in the range “102” to “251” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG3-1. On the other hand, in the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137D, when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probable change” during the normal state, and the total number of reserved storage is “0” to “4”. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of the selected special CA5-1, a special value in which the value in the range of “1” to “45” of the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination has a variation mode similar to that of the special PG1-3. A value in the range of “46” to “101” is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the special PH1-4 that has the same fluctuation pattern as that of the special PG1-4. "Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the special PH 3-1, which has the same fluctuation mode as that of the special PG 3-1.

  In addition, special CA4-3 and special CA5-2 variation pattern types (both variation patterns selected in the normal state when the total number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”), special Fluctuation pattern types of CB4-2 and special CB5-1 (variation pattern types that can be selected when both are in the probabilistic state), special CC4-2 and special CC5-1 (both in the short-time state, the total number of reserved storages is “0”) -Variation pattern type selected when any of "4"), special CC4-3 and special CC5-2 variation pattern types (both in short time state, the total number of pending storage is "5"-"8") The variation pattern type random number MR4 assigned to the variation pattern having the same variation mode is the same for the variation pattern type selected when the variation pattern type is any one of the above. That. Thereby, for example, the player has a “big hit” type of jackpot type due to the difference in the variation mode such as whether the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation in the specific effect of the “pseudo-ream” is 0 times or 2 times. It becomes difficult to predict whether there is a “fourth probability change”, and it is possible to make the player feel more surprising to the fact that the player has suddenly made a fifteen round big hit.

  It should be noted that it may be set so as not to cause the player to predict whether the jackpot type is “surprise” or “fourth probability variation” due to the difference in variation mode. If the ratio determined for each variation pattern is set to be substantially the same, the range of the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern need not be completely the same. As an example, when the jackpot type is determined as “surprise”, it is determined as one variation pattern type regardless of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and used when the jackpot type is “surprise”. The variation patterns (for example, special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PG3-) are the same as the variation mode executed when the big hit type is determined to be the “fourth probability variation” among the variation pattern types. 1) and a variation pattern (for example, special PG 1-1, special PG 1-2, special PG 1-6, special variability) which is different from the variation manner executed when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability variation”. PG2-1, special PG2-2), and the determination rate of each variation pattern that becomes the variation mode similar to the variation mode executed when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability variation” is the big hit type There may be set such that substantially the same as the determined rate of each change pattern of the fluctuation pattern type (e.g., special CA5-1) to be used when it is determined that "fourth probability variation". Specifically, corresponding to the variation pattern type of special CA4-2, a value in the range of “1” to “22” is allocated to the variation pattern of special PG1-1 in the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination. , A value in the range of “23” to “50” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG1-2, a value in the range of “51” to “67” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG1-6, and “68”. A value in the range of “79” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG2-1, a value in the range of “80” to “125” is assigned to the variation pattern of the special PG2-2, and “126” to “147”. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-3, the value of the range of "148" to "175" is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-4, and the value of the range of "176" to "251" Is special PG3- It is assumed to be set as assigned to the variation pattern. In the case of such a setting, each variation pattern (for example, special PG1-3, special PG1-4, special PG3) having a variation mode similar to the variation mode executed when the big hit type is determined to be “fourth probability variation”. -1), the ratio determined for special PG1-3 is about 18%, the ratio determined for special PG1-4 is about 22%, and the ratio determined for special PG3-1 is about 60%. . On the other hand, corresponding to the variation pattern type of special CA5-1, a value in the range of “1” to “45” among the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern of special PH1-3. , Values in the range of “46” to “101” are assigned to the variation pattern of the special PH1-4, and values in the range of “102” to “251” are assigned to the variation pattern of the special PH3-1. With such a setting, the ratio determined for the special PH1-3 having the same variation mode as that of the special PG1-3 among the variation patterns when the big hit type is determined to be "fourth probability variation". Is about 18%, the ratio determined for the special PH1-4, which is the same as the fluctuation mode of the special PG1-4, is about 22%, and the special PH3-3 is the same as the fluctuation mode of the special PG3-1. The ratio determined to 1 is about 60%. As described above, the variation pattern type used when the big hit type is “surprise” and the variation pattern type of the special CA 5-1 are the special PG 1-3, the special PG 1-4, and the special PG 3-1, respectively. Although the range of the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern assigned to each of the special PH1-3, the special PH1-4, and the special PH3-1 is different, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is allocated. The ratio is almost the same. Even in this case, it becomes difficult for the player to predict whether the jackpot type is “surprise” or “fourth likelihood” due to the difference in the variation mode, and therefore, the player is in a stunning fifteen round jackpot state. This can make you feel more surprising.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes the loss variation patterns 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. When it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”, the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate the variation pattern according to whether or not to reach the reach state, the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table, and the variation pattern type is determined to be one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as a usage table according to the result. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, when the variable display result of the effect symbol is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Data for determination to be assigned to any one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type when the variable display result of the effect symbol is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It consists of data for determination assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  Here, in the setting of the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 21, the non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponding to the case of non-reach fluctuation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-3. A random number value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for executing a specific effect such as reach PA1-7. Also, in response to the variation pattern type of non-reach CB1-3, a specific effect in which the value in the range of “1” to “100” of the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is “end of development opportunity eye” is executed. Assigned to the non-reach PA1-7 fluctuation pattern. With such settings, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the variable display result of the effect symbol is “losing” and the determination that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state. It is possible to determine that one of the variation patterns of the reach PA1-7 and perform an effect operation as a specific effect.

  For the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4, in the variation pattern type determination table 136A for non-reach shown in FIG. 17A, among the random value MR3 for determination of variation pattern type, non-reach HA1- A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned corresponding to 1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to the non-reach HA 1-2. A value in the range of “231” to “241” is assigned corresponding to HA1-3, and a range of “237” to “241” corresponding to each of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. Value is assigned. Here, for the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 15A, the reach determination disturbance corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR2-2. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and “1” to “217” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3 to which a value in the range is assigned, the reach determination table 134A corresponds to the total pending storage number “2”, “3”, and the reach determination disorder A value in the range of “1” to “220” is assigned to the numerical value MR2-2. For the determination result of non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, “1” to “230” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination corresponding to the total reserved memory number “4”. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-5, in the reach determination table 134A, the total stored memory number corresponds to “5” to “8” and “1” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “1”, “2”, or “3”, the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is determined as compared with the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0”. The rate of being reduced. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “4” or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2”. As compared with the above, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is low.

  In the example of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 8, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. 3.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach PA1 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of −5 is 16.70 seconds, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 in which the specific effect of “Intro” is executed is 10.20 seconds, The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the special figure change time in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the special figure change time in the change pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is “4” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the total number of stored storages is less than “4”. Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the setting of the losing fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 22, the fluctuation for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the case where the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA2-1. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-10. Yes. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA2-3 or super CB2-1, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is included in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β such as super PB3-1 to super PB3-6. Assigned.

  In addition, a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, such as a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-5, Super PA 3-9, Super PA 3-10, Super PB 3-4, Super PB 3-5. With regard to the variation pattern, the variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol has reached the reach state after the pseudo continuous variation is performed. That is, since the fluctuation patterns of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-5, Super PA 3-9, and Super PA 3-10 are fluctuation patterns for executing reach effect α1, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, a random value MR4 for variation pattern determination is assigned. Since the variation patterns of the super PB 3-4 and the super PB 3-5 are variation patterns for executing the reach effect β, the variation pattern types of the super CA 2-3 and the super CB 2-1 are used in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. Corresponding to the case, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of normal CA 2-1 and super CA 2-2, the variation pattern type determination is performed in any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. A random value MR3 is assigned. Further, the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135C shown in FIGS. ing. For the variation pattern type of the super CB 2-1, the random value MR 3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135 B shown in FIG. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the effect in the reach effect that is executed based on the variable display state of the effect symbol being in the reach state. Table data (determination data) is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of operation. In addition, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified by type.

  As described above, the determination of the variation pattern is performed in two stages, such as being performed after determining the variation pattern type, and the determination of reach production is included in the variation pattern type of the first step. Even when various effects other than effects are performed, when changing the appearance rate of a specific reach effect at the development stage, it is only necessary to change the distribution of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, and it is easy to develop. Become.

  Further, in the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. 18, the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination has a range of “1” to “3” corresponding to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-2. The value is assigned to the variation pattern of Super PA4-1 that does not execute the specific effect. Among the random numbers MR4 for determining the variation pattern, values in the range of “4” to “11” are assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-2 that executes the specific effect of “slip”. The value in the range of “21” is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 that executes the specific effect of “intro”. Among the random values MR4 for determining the variation pattern, the value in the range of “22” to “34” is the variation pattern of the super PA 4-4 that executes the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the all-revariable display operation is performed twice. The value in the range of “35” to “52” is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-5 that executes the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” in which the all-revariable display operation is performed three times. . On the other hand, in the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 22, “1” to “66” among the random values MR4 for variation pattern determination corresponding to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-2. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-1, which does not execute the specific effect. Of the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, values in the range of “67” to “120” are assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-2 that executes the specific effect of “slip”. The value in the range of “161” is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-3 that executes the specific effect of “intro”. Among the random values MR4 for determining the variation pattern, the value in the range of “162” to “193” is the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 that executes the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the all-revariation display operation is performed twice And a value in the range of “194” to “203” is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA 3-5 that executes the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the all-revariable display operation is performed three times. .

  As described above, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 4-1 that does not execute the specific effect is the super PA 4-2 to the super PA 4-5 that executes the specific effect. The ratio is determined to be lower than any of the fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing”, the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-1 that does not execute the specific effect is the super PA 3-2 to the super PA 3-3 that executes the specific effect. It is higher than the ratio determined by any one of the five fluctuation patterns. With such a setting, when the reach effect α is executed, the reliability when the specific effect is executed is more reliable than the case where the specific effect is not executed (the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”). Can be high.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 that executes the specific effect of “intro” is the super PA 4− that executes the specific effect of “slip”. It is higher than the ratio determined by the fluctuation pattern of 2. The ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 4-4 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” that performs the all-revariable display operation twice is the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 that executes the specific effect of the “intro”. It is higher than the determined rate. The ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 4-5 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” that performs the all-revariable display operation three times is higher than the ratio determined by the all-revariable display. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing”, the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-3 that executes “intro” is the super PA 3- that executes the specific effect of “slip”. It is lower than the ratio determined by the fluctuation pattern of 2. The ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” that performs the all-revariable display operation twice is determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-3 that executes the “intro”. It is lower than the rate. The ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-5 that executes the specific effect of “pseudo-run” that performs the total re-variable display operation three times is the ratio that is determined for the specific effect of “pseudo-run” that performs the total re-change display operation twice It is lower than the ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 to be executed. With this setting, the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”) is greater when the “Intro” specific effect is executed than when the “Slip” specific effect is executed. In addition, the reliability can be increased when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed rather than when the “intro” specific effect is executed.

  Furthermore, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the total re-variable display operation is performed twice. While the ratio determined by the fluctuation pattern of the Super PA 4-5 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” that performs the re-variable display operation three times is higher, the variable display result is “lost” In this case, the “pseudo-continuous display operation” is performed three times more than the ratio determined in the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 that executes the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” performing the total re-variable display operation twice. The ratio determined by the variation pattern of the super PA 3-5 that executes the specific effect “is lower. With such a setting, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, it is more reliable when the total re-variable display operation is performed three times than when the total re-variable display operation is performed twice. The degree (possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit”) can be increased.

  In correspondence with the type of reach effect, the random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect, the type of the specific effect, and the number of executions of the total variation display operation in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. By setting different values, the reliability of execution of a specific reach effect differs depending on whether or not the specific effect is executed, the type of the specific effect, and the number of executions of the total variation display operation in the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous”. It may be allowed.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 has a game control data holding area as shown in FIG. 23 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. 150 is provided. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 23 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special figure game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 14 and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. On-hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 8a) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening. Numeric data indicating the jackpot determination random number value or numeric data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value is set as the pending data, and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. The hold data of the game (the special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the winning order to the second starting winning opening. Numeric data indicating the jackpot determination random number value or numeric data indicating the jackpot type determination random number value is set as the pending data, and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which game ball has won in either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, so that the order of winning of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151C stores “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening or “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second starting winning opening. The game ball is stored in association with the hold number according to the winning order of each game ball.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, a big hit start flag, and the like.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, the time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 31 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 31 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special figure fluctuation time which is the execution time of the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The normal time variation timer is for measuring the time for controlling the progress of the normal time game, such as the normal time fluctuation time, which is the execution time of the normal time game, on the main board 31 side. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a round number counter, a winning number counter, and the like. .

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 503, so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, numerical data indicating various random values (random 2-1, 2-2, 3, 4, 5, 6) are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, and the CPU 103 As the software is executed, numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated. The winning number counter is for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening. For example, data indicating a count initial value “0” is set in the winning number counter as the winning number count value every time the round starts. Each time a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning number count value is incremented by one and updated.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a variable special figure designation buffer, a jackpot type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 31 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of (for example, “12”) buffer areas, and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) is “1” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 8a. Set to Further, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 8b. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0” in response to the completion of the special figure game.

  In the big hit type buffer, the variable display mode of the effect symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types of big hit types such as “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, “surprise probability”. The buffer value corresponding to the determination result of which to be determined is stored. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 12, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the value of the jackpot type buffer (hit type buffer value) is set to “00”, and the jackpot type When the type is “first probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “01”, and when the big hit type is “second probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “02” and the big hit type is In the case of “third probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “03”, and in the case of the big hit type “fourth probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “04”, ", The big hit type buffer value is set to" 05 ".

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the first decorative symbol display 9a or the second decorative symbol display 9b so as to start the decorative symbol variable display, and the effect display device. In step 9, control is performed so as to start variable display of effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of the big hit game. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the display results of the decorative symbols and the production symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H), so that the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are specified as the display results. It is called a command.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbols (and decoration symbols) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command, fanfare designation command). The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start designation 2 designation command, and a sudden start designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game and an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the jackpot game is a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (surprise end specification command: ending 3 specification command) that specifies the end of a game of sudden probability change.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) that designates the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by 1. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending storage number subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending storage number, but does not use the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and does not use the total pending storage number subtraction designation command. When the stored number is subtracted, the combined pending storage number after the subtraction may be designated by a combined pending storage number designation command.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 24, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result specifying command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 on the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, the variable pattern command and the display result specifying command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the design symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display. The image display device 9 that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in 8b, and that produces the effect according to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts, it is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Note that the command 8D01 (H) (first symbol variation designation command) and the command 8D02 (H) (second symbol variation designation command) are executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 by the first special symbol display 8a. Whether the first design symbol display unit 9a that performs variable display of the first design as a design for decoration (production) during the variable display time of the design changes the design of the design, by the second special design display 8b. It is used to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is changed in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that performs variable display of the second decorative symbol during the variable display time of the second special symbol.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that the game ball has won the first start port switch 13a or the second start port 14 for detecting that the game ball has won the first start game port 13. If the second start port switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning is generated, start port switch passing processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of a special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total reserved storage number). The number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. Update to a value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. If the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbol and the decorative symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting a presentation control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for the presentation control, a process for confirming that the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process executed when at least one of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 is turned on by the first start port switch 13a. Whether or not (step S211). If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first reserved memory number is 4 (step S212). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4, the process proceeds to step S221.

  If the value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S214).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 27A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 27A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 27A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the second start is determined. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in order of winning based on winning in the winning opening 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 27B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 extracts a value from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating a software random number, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (step S215). . In the process of step S215, random R (big hit determination random number) and software random number 2-1 (see FIG. 10) are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first start winning designation command (step S216). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (step S217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a total pending storage number designation command indicating the total pending storage number based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (step S218). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the first start winning designation command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets an address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is turned on (step S221). If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 4 (step S222). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the process is terminated. If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4, the CPU 56 may perform the process of confirming again whether the first start port switch 13a is on (see step S211).

  If the value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S223). Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (step S225). Note that in the process of step S225, random R (a big hit determination random number) and random 2-1 (see FIG. 10) are stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second start winning designation command (step S226). Further, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending storage number counter by 1 (step S227). Then, the CPU 56 transmits a total pending storage number designation command based on the value of the total pending storage number counter (step S228). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the second start winning designation command.

  In addition, you may implement | achieve the process of step S213-218 and the process of step S223-228 by one common routine. In that case, the CPU 56 first sets data indicating “first” when detecting that the first start port switch 13a is turned on, and indicates that the second start port switch 14a is turned on. When data is detected, the data indicating “second” is set, and the common storage routine selects the reserved memory number buffer (first reserved memory number buffer or second reserved memory number buffer) according to the set data. Or a start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) is selected.

  28 and 29 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 27A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). If it is data indicating “first”, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) is set to “first 1 "is set (step S53). If it is not data indicating “first”, that is, if it is data indicating “second”, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 stores the count value of the total pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (step S57), and then decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S307 can be shared between the case where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area, and executes a jackpot determination module (step S61). The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 11) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, the probability change jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 11 in the ROM 54 are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values are the probability variation jackpot determination table. And a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 11 in the ROM 54 are set) are set. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. In other words, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, set in the process of ending the big hit game, determined to be a normal big hit, and reset in the process of ending the big hit game.

  If the random R value does not match any of the jackpot determination values, the process proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 12 is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Types (“normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation” corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2-1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area ”,“ Fourth Probability ”, or“ Sudden Accuracy ”) is determined as the jackpot type (step S73). Further, the data indicating the determined jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal”, “00” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “first probability variation”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, When the jackpot type is “second probability variation”, “02” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, “03” is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, “04” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “surprise”, “05” is set as the data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”, “1”, which is the two round big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined as “normal” or “probability change”, “3” or “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91).

  When the jackpot flag is set, the table used for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types is used as the table according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the use variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132M is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S101. The CPU 56 can determine the gaming state based on the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  When the big hit flag is not set, based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, the effect symbol is displayed according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected as a table used for determining whether or not the variable display state is the reach state (step S95). Further, random 2-2 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 2-2 (step S96). Then, the CPU 56 is in the reach state corresponding to the value that matches the random value 2-2 in the area corresponding to the reserved storage number (the value of the reserved storage number counter) in any of the selected reach determination tables 134A to 134C. Based on the data indicating presence / absence, whether or not to reach, the type of effect when not reaching or the type of reach when reaching is determined (step S97). Note that the value before decremented by -1 in the process of step S56 may be used as the reserved storage number used in the process of step S97.

  If it is decided to reach, the variation pattern type is determined according to the reach type (reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1 or reach HC2-1) determined in the process of step S97. One of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types (step S <b> 99). If it is decided not to reach, the types of effects determined in the process of step S97 (non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1- 1 or non-reach HC1-2), one of non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. (Step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  In step S101, the CPU 56 extracts the value of random 3 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 3. Then, based on the extracted random 3 value, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the table selected in the process of step S92, S94, S99 or S100 (step S102). .

  Next, the CPU 56 determines hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137D as outlier variation patterns as tables used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. One of the determination tables 138A and 138B is selected (step S103). Further, the value of random 4 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 4 (step S104). Then, based on the extracted random value 4, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103 (step S105).

  Next, control is performed to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (step S107). For example, a start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit any effect control command (see FIG. 24) from the display result 1 designation to the display result 7 designation in accordance with the determined jackpot type and deviation. This is performed (step S111).

  Then, a total pending storage number subtraction designation command designating that 1 is subtracted from the total pending storage number is transmitted (step S112). Instead of transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted. Further, the CPU 56 stores the transmitted display result specifying command in the effect symbol type storage area in the RAM 55.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S113).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step S125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S126), the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (step S304). The updated value is updated (step S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. Then, a control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (step S131). If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for production control is performed (step S132). If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S139 (step S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (step S134), and performs control to send a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is suddenly a probable big hit, a sudden start designation command is transmitted. Otherwise, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. Whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit is determined based on data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  Also, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S136). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of a normal big hit and a probable big hit (15 round big hit) and 2 times in the case of a sudden hit (2 round big hit)) is set in the big prize opening number counter (step). S137). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S138).

  In step S139, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set. If the time reduction flag is set, the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (step S140). Then, when the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, the time reduction flag is reset (step S142). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S143).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (step S305). In the big prize opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by 1 (step S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, the CPU 56 designates the big prize opening opening designation command (A1XX) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). (H)) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S403). Note that the CPU 56 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the number-of-releases counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the CPU 56 controls to open the special winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) by driving the solenoid 21 (step S404) and decrements the value of the number-of-opening counter (step S405).

  Further, a value corresponding to the maximum time that the big prize opening can be opened in each round is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S406). For example, in the case of 15 rounds of big hit, the maximum time is 29 seconds, and in the case of sudden probability big hit, the maximum time is 0.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the step large winning opening opening process (step S306) (step S415).

  FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing the special prize opening process during the special symbol process (step S306). In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special prize opening control timer by -1 (step S420).

  Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S421). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (step S432). If the count switch 23 is not turned on, the process is terminated. When the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is incremented by 1 (step S433). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S434). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined number, the process is terminated. Note that the determination order of S421 and S432 may be reversed.

  When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0, or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number, the CPU 56 controls to drive the solenoid 21 to close the big winning opening (step). S435). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the opening number counter (step S438). When the value of the number-of-opening counter is not 0, the CPU 56 designates the post-big prize opening after-opening designation command (A2XX (H)) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the end of the round). ) Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S439). Then, a value corresponding to the time (interval period) from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval period) is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S440), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the big prize opening. The value is updated according to the pre-opening process (step S305) (step S441). The interval period is, for example, 5 seconds. In the case of a sudden probability big hit, it may be shorter than the 15R big hit.

  When the value of the number-of-opens counter is 0, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the big hit end time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit game has ended in the effect display device 9) in the big prize opening control timer. (Step S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (Step S307) (Step S443).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S150). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S154. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S151), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S152). Here, if it is a probable big hit, a jackpot end 2 designation command is transmitted, if it is suddenly a probable big hit, a sudden end designation command is transmitted, and if it is none, a jackpot end 1 designation command is transmitted. To do. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (the big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S153), and the processing is ended. Note that the process of step S152 may be executed before step S442 in the special winning opening opening process.

  In step S154, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S155). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot (step S158).

  If the big hit type is a probability change big hit or a sudden probability change big hit, the probability change flag is set and the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state (step S161). Then, the process proceeds to step S162. If neither the probability variation big hit nor sudden probability variation big hit is found, the time reduction flag is set (step S162), and for example, 100 is set in the time reduction number counter (step S163). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S164).

  Next, a specific example of the specific effect executed during variable display will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. In addition, the character as the production information attached to the production symbol is omitted. FIG. 38 shows an effect produced by the control of the effect control microcomputer 100 when the variable effect of the effect symbol is “non-reach”, when the specific effect is not executed, and when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display device 9. FIG. When the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect is not executed as shown in FIGS. 38 (C1) and (C2). When the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 is designated, a specific effect of “slip” as shown in FIGS. 38 (E1) to (E4) is executed. When the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-5 is designated, the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects as shown in FIGS. 38 (D1) to (D6) are executed. 38 (D1) to 38 (D6) show simplified pseudo-continuous effects.

  In the example shown in FIG. 38A, for example, in response to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed. In all, the production design changes. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” symbol display area 9L.

  When the specific effect is not executed or when the “slip” specific effect is executed, corresponding to the determination that the effect symbol “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, FIG. A stop display of the effect symbol as shown in FIG. If the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern is always determined to be the slip TP1-1. Then (see FIG. 50), the “slip” specific effect is executed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, which causes the effect symbol to re-variate at high speed. Therefore, the effect symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L is not changed depending on the specific effect of “slip”. When a specific effect of “pseudo ream” is executed, when an effect symbol of “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, an effect symbol stop display as shown in FIG. Done.

  After that, when the specific effect is not executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (C1), the effect symbol “7” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. As shown in 38 (C2), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display). Is done. At this time, the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R and the “middle” symbol display area 9C are determined as the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (D1), the “7” effect symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (D2), by stopping the display of the “6” effect symbol in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that becomes the pseudo-continuous chance GC6 is stopped. Is displayed. At this time, for example, a temporary stop display such as a fluctuation change display of the effect symbols is performed, and then the effect symbols are changed again in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as shown in FIG. 38 (D3). Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (D4) to (D6), the effect symbols “6”, “7”, and “4” are sequentially applied in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the stop display (temporary stop display), the effect symbol which is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  When the “slip” specific effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (E1), the “5” effect symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Thus, as shown in FIG. 38 (E2), the effect symbol is re-varied at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 38 (E3), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the effect symbol “7” is displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. Here, as shown in FIG. 38 (E1), the effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R is determined based on, for example, the determined right final stop symbol FZ1-2 (see FIG. 38). 45). Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (E4), after the effect symbol “4” is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C (temporary stop display), the effect symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped. Displayed (final stop display).

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation example when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach” or when the variable display result is “big hit”. In the example shown in FIG. 39 (A), for example, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” correspond to the start of variation of the special symbol in the variable symbol special display. In all, the production design changes. After that, as shown in FIG. 39B, the effect symbol “6” is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the symbol display area 9L of “left”.

  And, for example, when the specific effect of “slip” is executed as in the case where the variation pattern is Super PA 3-2 or Super PA 4-2, as shown in FIGS. 39 (C1) to (C3). After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are changed again in the “right” symbol display area 9R and then stopped and displayed. The effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed so that the variable display state of the symbol becomes the reach state. Further, for example, when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PA 3-4 or Super PA 4-4, as shown in FIGS. 39 (D1) to (D5). In addition, after the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (pseudo continuous variation) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. . After that, the effect symbols “6” in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R are all stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), and the effect symbol variable display state becomes the reach state. 39 (D1) to (D5) show an example in which the pseudo continuous variation is one time, actually, the pseudo continuous variation corresponding to the variation pattern is executed. When reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 39 (C3) or 39 (D5), the reach effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the effect control process of steps S704 to S709.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a first decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S706). In the first decorative symbol display control process, display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a is executed. Further, a second decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S707). In the second decorative symbol display control process, display control of the second decorative symbol display 9b is executed. Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S708). Furthermore, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number used for determining a production mode or the like is executed (step S709). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702. As in the special symbol process executed by the game control microcomputer 560, the first ornament symbol display control process and the second ornament symbol display control process are made common, that is, realized by one program module. Thus, the capacity of the program executed by the production control microcomputer 100 may be reduced.

  41 and 42 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the RAM (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read out.

  As the command reception buffer, for example, a command reception buffer in a ring buffer format capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 24) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the display result specifying command (one of display result 1 specifying command to display result 5 specifying command) in the RAM. The displayed display result specifying command storage area is stored (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S624). If the received effect control command is a surprise start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a surprise start designation command reception flag (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S627), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S629), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S630).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command or a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S642). If the received effect control command is a surprise end designation command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a sudden end specification command reception flag (step S644).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S645), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S646). Further, if the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (step S647), the production control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening (step S648).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S649). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display mode of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b are composed of two LEDs. And as shown in FIG. 43, it lights alternately every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). When the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the upper LED is turned on as a display result of a decorative symbol reminiscent of the jackpot (see FIG. 43A). Further, when the display result of the special symbol is changed to the off symbol, the lower LED is turned on as the display result of the decorative symbol reminiscent of the off symbol (see FIG. 43B).

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the production control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, and the temporary stop symbols for determining the promotion effect. A random number SR2, a random number SR3 for determining a temporary stop symbol at the time of a slip / development chance, a random number SR4-1 for determining a first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol, a random number SR4-2 for determining a second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol, Random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol, random number SR5 for determining promotion effect execution, random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern, random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern , Random number SR7 for determining notice type, random number SR8-1 for determining first step up notice, random number SR8-2 for determining second step up notice, random number SR8-3 for determining moving object step up notice, e-mail notice Fixed random number SR8-4, random number SR8-5 for determining card advance notice, random number SR8-6 for determining frame advance notice, random number SR8-7 for determining effect vane advance notice, random number SR8 for determining other system liquid crystal advance notice -8, random number SR9-1 for determining the first mini character notice, random number SR9-2 for determining the second mini character notice, random number SR9-3 for determining the third mini character notice, random number SR9-4 for determining the fourth mini character notice , A random number SR9-5 for determining the fifth mini character notice, a random number SR9-6 for determining the sixth mini character notice, a random number SR10 for determining the notice notice during reach, a random number SR11 for determining the notice pattern during reach, and a random number for determining the development effect SR12 is used. Note that random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the effect.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left” and “middle” in the display area of the effect display device 9 as finalized effect symbols that are variable display results of the effect symbols. , A random number value used to determine the effect symbols (final stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. The final stop symbols here are finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R when the variable display of the effect symbols ends. These are the three production symbols. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect is temporarily stopped in the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R for "left", "middle", and "right" when executing the promotion effect during change. It is a random value used for determining the effect symbol of the normal jackpot combination to be displayed, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance is “left”, “middle”, This is a random value used for determining the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all or part of the “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and values in the range of “1” to “101”. Take.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random value used to determine a combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, the random effect value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination Or a random number value used for determining whether or not to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  Random values SR6-1 and SR6-3 for determining the first and third specific effect patterns include a plurality of specific effect patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect operation when executing the specific effects such as “slip” and “intro”. A random value used to determine one of the types. As an example, the random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “slip” specific effect, and is in the range of “1” to “71”. Takes a value. The random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is used to determine a specific effect pattern in the case of executing the specific effect of “Intro”, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. .

  The random number SR7 for determining the notice type includes a plurality of notice types ("No notice", "First step up notice effect", "Email notice effect", "Card notice effect", "Step up movable object" shown in FIG. 82). Random number used to determine which notice type is to be executed among “notice effect” and “other system liquid crystal notice effect”). The random number SR7 for determining the notice type takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”.

  Random number SR8-1 for determining the first step-up notice is a random number used for determining the content (presence / absence / effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect. The random number SR8-1 for determining the first step-up notice takes a value in the range of “1” to “500”. The random number SR8-2 for determining the second step-up notice is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the second step-up notice effect. The random number SR8-2 for determining the second step-up notice takes a value in the range of “1” to “600”. The random number SR8-3 for determining the moving object step-up notice is a random number used to determine the content (presence / effect state) of the moving object step-up notice effect. The random number SR8-3 for determining the moving object step-up notice takes a value of “1” to “100”.

  E-mail notice determination random number SR8-4 is a random number used to determine the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the e-mail notice effect. The random number SR8-4 for determining the mail notice takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”. The random number SR8-5 for determining the card notice is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect form) of the card notice effect. The random number SR8-5 for determining a card notice takes a value in the range of “1” to “1009”.

  The frame notice determination random number SR8-6 is a random number used to determine the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the frame notice effect. The random number SR8-6 for frame notice determination takes a value in the range of “1” to “50”. The random number SR8-7 for determining the effect blade announcement is a random number used to determine the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the blade object notification effect. The random number SR8-7 for determining the effect blade accessory notice takes a value in the range of “1” to “50”. The random number SR8-8 for determining the other system liquid crystal notice is a random number used for determining the content (presence / absence / effect mode) of the other system liquid crystal notice effect. The random number SR8-8 for determining the other system liquid crystal notice takes a value in the range of “1” to “50”.

  Random numbers SR9-1 to 9-6 for determining the first to sixth mini character notices are random numbers used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect form) of the first to sixth mini character notice effects. Random numbers SR9-1 to 9-6 for determining the first to sixth mini character notices take values in the range of “1” to “200”. The contents of each notice effect will be described later.

  The random number SR10 for determining the advance notice during reach is a random number used for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice during reach. The random number SR10 for determining the advance notice during reach takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. Random number SR11 for determining a reaching notice pattern, a random number used to determine a reaching notice pattern when executing a reach notice. The random number SR11 for determining the reach notice pattern during reach takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. This is a random number SR12 for determining the development effect, and a random number used for determining the content (existence / effect mode) of the development effect. The development effect determination random number SR12 takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 101 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, a final stop shown in FIGS. 45 (A) to (D) is used as a table for determining a definite production symbol to be one of the predetermined non-reach combinations and the development chances HC1 to HC8. Symbol determination tables 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 45 (A) is a final final symbol that is a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A is based on the determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is configured. The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 45 (B) is the final right symbol that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes a random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It consists of data for determination assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 45C is a final final symbol that is a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determining the stop symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like. .

  Here, the determination table stored in the ROM includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 46. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, It is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. Are determined data to be assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the middle final stop symbols FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 45B, the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. Is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the combination of the finalized design is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the chances of success TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. In addition, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 45C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined production symbols. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that becomes the combination of. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the part that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 7A, the part that becomes the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 7 (C), random number values SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol are displayed in the portions that become the chance of chances TC1 to TC4, and further in the portion that is a fixed non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Not assigned. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance HC1 to HC8, or a random chance TC1. ˜TC4, and even certain non-reach combinations similar to these chances.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 45 (D) shows the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L and 9C when the specific effect “end of development chance” is executed. , The final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6 at 9R are determined based on the random numbers SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbols. It is a table that is referred to to determine either. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is composed of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the development chance items HC1 to HC8.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B shown in FIGS. 48 (A) and 48 (B) as tables for determining a definite effect symbol to be a reach-losing combination. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 48A is a left final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L among the finalized effect symbols that are reach-losing combinations. -1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R, based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referenced to determine. The final stop symbol determination table 162A has a rendering symbol (left and right final stop symbol FZ2) in which the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. −1, FZ2-2), the data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 48B is a final final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C among the determined effect symbols that are the reach-losing combinations. -3 is a table that is referred to to determine -3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  Here, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference which is a difference value from the symbol number of the effect symbol which becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 or the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variable display of effect symbols, the effect symbols start to change in the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and “left” → “right” → “ When the definite effect symbol that is the variable display result of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined order such as “medium”, “left” and “right” other than the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is The difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the "medium" effect symbol display area 9C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a definite effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. The super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-5, the super PB 3-1 to the super PB 3-6, and the super PC 3-1 to the super PC 3-4. The random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is changed to the symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, and “+2” depending on the case where the variation pattern is any of −10. It consists of decision data to be assigned.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes, for example, final stop symbol determination tables shown in FIGS. 49A to 49D as tables for determining a definite effect symbol to be one of the big hit combinations and the odd chances TC1 to TC4. 163A to 163D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 49 (A) is stopped in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the determined effect symbols that are usually the big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 49 (B) is stopped in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the confirmed effect symbols that are the probable big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 49 (C) shows the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”. The left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 are determined as the random chance values TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table that is referred to to determine either. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is made up of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the odd chance items TC1 to TC4. The final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 49 (D) shows the left in each of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” when the big hit type is “probable”. The combination of the confirmed effect symbols that become the middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 is selected from the random chance values TC1 to TC4 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine. The final stop symbol determination table 163D is composed of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the probability chance items TC1 to TC4.

  Here, in the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 49 (C), among the random number values SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol with respect to the probability chance TC1, “1” to “30”. A value in the range is assigned, and a value in the range of “31” to “55” is assigned to the chance of chance TC2. Also, a value in the range of “56” to “70” is assigned to the random chance value TC3 for the random chance value TC4 for determining the first final stop symbol, and the random chance value TC4 is assigned to the random chance value TC4. Is assigned a value in the range of “71” to “80”. On the other hand, in the final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 49D, among the random number values SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol, “1” to “10” with respect to the odd chance TC1. A value in the range of “11” to “25” is assigned to the chance of chance TC2. Also, a value in the range of “26” to “50” among the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to the chance of chance TC3, and the chance of chance TC4 is determined. Is assigned a value in the range of “51” to “80”. Therefore, when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, as compared with the case where the big hit type is “surprise”, any one of the winning chance items TC1 and TC2 is used as a combination of the definitive effect symbols as the final stop symbols. The ratio at which either of the chance chance items TC3 and TC4 is determined is low. As a result, as a final stop symbol, depending on which of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed, it is suggested to the player whether the jackpot type is “fourth probability change” or “accuracy”. Can do.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes, for example, specific effect pattern determination tables 164A and 164C shown in FIGS. 50A and 50B as tables for determining any one of the specific effect patterns. Yes. When the specific effect “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 50A slides the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to slip TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-7, super PA4-2, super PA4-7, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Super PF1-3, Special PG1-2, Special For determining a first specific effect pattern according to a change pattern (see FIGS. 8 and 9) in which a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as a change pattern of PG2-2, special PG3-3, and special PH3-3. The random number value SR6-1 is determined data to be assigned to the specific effect patterns of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4, etc. It is configured.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the effect symbols in all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, “left” and By temporarily stopping and displaying the effect symbols in the “right” effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R, and then causing the effect symbol display area 9R of the “right” to re-variate at high speed, In the “right” effect symbol display area 9R, an effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then “left” and “right”. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbol display area L of “Left” is re-fluctuated at a high speed and then stopped and displayed. The effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed in the effect symbol display area 9L. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the effect symbols in all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, “left” and “right” After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbol display area 9R is changed to the low speed after the effect symbols are changed again at a low speed. The effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 9R is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the effect symbols in all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, “left” and “right” After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbol display area 9L of the “left” is re-varied to a low speed and then stopped and displayed. The effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed in the effect symbol display area 9L.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 50B indicates the specific effect pattern in the intro TP3 based on the third specific effect pattern determination random number SR6-3 when the “intro” specific effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to intro TP3-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164C includes non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-8, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-8, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super In response to a variation pattern (see FIGS. 8 and 9) in which a specific effect of “intro” is executed, such as the variation pattern of PB5-3, the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is converted into intro TP3. -1 to intro TP3-3 are made up of determination data to be assigned to specific production patterns.

  Here, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, for example, whether the previous effect buffer value provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 shown in FIG. 59 is “1” to “3”. Accordingly, the assignment of the random value 6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern to each specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-1 to the intro TP3-3 corresponding to a plurality of types of effect operations is different. The previous effect buffer value is set to “1” when the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined to be intro TP3-1, and is set to “2” when it is determined as intro TP3-2. When it is determined to be intro TP3-3, it is set to “3”. When the previous effect buffer value is “1”, the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-1, and the previous effect buffer value is “2”. In some cases, the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is not assigned to the intro TP3-2, and when the previous effect buffer value is “3”, the intro TP3-3 is set to the intro TP3-3. 3 The random value SR6-3 for determining the specific effect pattern is not assigned. When the specific effect of “intro” is executed according to the variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6 by such assignment, the specific effect same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “intro” executed last time It can be prevented from becoming a pattern.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes a fluctuating promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 51 (A) and a jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 51 (B). In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 51A, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). Is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect based on the promotion effect execution determination random value SR5. The changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A changes the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”. It consists of decision data assigned to the determination result indicating the presence or absence of the promotion effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, a part of the randomized value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result of the promotion effect during the change, and the rest is changing. It is assigned to the determination result without promotion effect. In this case, if the determination result indicates that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion failure effect is executed. When the jackpot type is “first probability variation”, a part of the random effect value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result with the changing promotion effect, and the rest is determined without the changing promotion effect. Assigned to the result. In this case, if the determination result indicates that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion success effect is executed. Further, when the big hit type is “second probability variation” or “fourth probability variation”, the random value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination is all assigned to the determination result of no variation promotion effect, and the promotion during variation Neither the successful production nor the fluctuating promotion production will be executed.

  In the big hit middle promotion effect execution decision table 165B shown in FIG. 51 (B), the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). In this case, the table is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. The jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B determines whether the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, and determines the promotion effect execution determination random number SR5 as a jackpot. It is composed of data for determination assigned to determination results indicating the presence or absence of a promotion promotion effect or a jackpot promotion failure effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. It will be. When the jackpot type is “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “fourth probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the jackpot. In other words, neither the jackpot promotion promotion effect or the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. Further, when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, a part of the random effect value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, and the rest has the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect. Is assigned to the judgment result. In this case, depending on the determination result, either the jackpot promotion promotion success effect or the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, temporary stop symbols shown in FIGS. 52A to 52D are used as tables for determining the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed when the specific effect of “slip” is executed. Decision tables 166A to 166D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D has a temporary slip / development chance temporary according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the effect symbol display area where the effect symbols are changed again. The random number value SR3 for determining the stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped. That is, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is an effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. In response to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the slip / development chance temporary stop symbol is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “1” of the effect symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1. Data for determination to be assigned to “8” is included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is a symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. According to the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. Contains decision data to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is a symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In response to the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3. Contains decision data to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is a symbol of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with the numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4. Contains decision data to be assigned to.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, FIGS. 53A to 53C and FIGS. 53A and 53B are used as tables for determining the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. 54 (A) to (C), temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167F are included. Each of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167F indicates that the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, normal PA2-4, super PA3-4, super PA3- 5, Super PA3-9, Super PA3-10, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-5, Super PA4-9, Super PA4-10, Super PA5-4, Super PA5-5, Super PB3-4, Super PB3- 5, Super PB4-4, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3, Special PG1-5, Special PH1-3, Special PH1-5 Or the remaining number of re-variable display operations that are executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped. Depending on, it is selected as the usage table. Here, the remaining number of re-variation display operations is “0” in the variation of the effect design (pseudo continuous variation) in which the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, and the temporary stop symbol one time before that Becomes “1” in the variation of the effect symbol in which the stop display is displayed (pseudo continuous variation), and becomes “2” in the variation of the effect symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is displayed twice before (pseudo continuous variation). By the time of execution of the pseudo continuous variation in which the finalized design symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the variation of the production symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed (pseudo continuous variation) is “3”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the fluctuation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A is all executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the fluctuation pattern being non-reach PA1-5 or normal PA2-4. When the remaining number of re-variable display operations is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L, and the “right” effect symbol display In order to determine the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the area 9R, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "medium" effect symbol display area 9C. Is used as the usage table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-5, Super PA 3-9, Super PA 3-10, Super PA 4-4, Super PA 4-5, Super PA 4-9, Super PA 4-10. , Super PA5-4, Super PA5-5, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-4, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1 Accordingly, in the case where the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “1”, the “left” effect symbol display area 9L is displayed. Left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped, and temporarily stopped in the "right" effect symbol display area 9R. Right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as a symbol, is selected as the usage table for determining a temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 While the design in which the temporary stop displayed on performance symbol display area 9C "medium".

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C is a total re-variable display operation that is executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation patterns being special PG1-3 and special PH1-3. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 to be temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L, and the “right” effect symbol display area 9R. As a use table for determining the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as the right symbol for temporary stop display and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as the middle symbol for temporary stop display in the "medium" effect symbol display area 9C. Selected. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D performs all replays executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the change pattern being either special PG1-5 or special PH1-5. When the remaining number of times of the variable display operation is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 that becomes the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L, the “right” effect symbol display area The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol for temporary stop display at 9R, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol for temporary stop display in the "medium" effect symbol display area 9C, are determined. Selected as a usage table.

  In addition, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167E has a variation pattern of normal PA2-4, super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3-9, super PA3-10, super PA4-4, super PA4-5, super PA4. -9, Super PA4-10, Super PA5-4, Super PA5-5, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-4, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Super PF1 -1, the special PG1-3, or the special PH1-3, the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “ 2 ", the left temporary stop symbol KZ that becomes the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the" left "effect symbol display area 9L. −1, right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R, and middle symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “middle” effect symbol display area 9C. It is selected as a use table for determining the temporary stop symbol KZ3-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167F has a variation pattern of super PA3-5, super PA3-10, super PA4-5, super PA4-10, super PA5-5, super PB3-5, super PB4-5, super PB5-5. When the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed according to being one of the super PF 1-1 is “3”, Left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is a left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L, and right temporary stop symbol, which is a right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” effect symbol display area 9R. KZ4-2, selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C. That. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, special PG1-5, or special PH1-5, the number of executions of the all-revariable display operation for re-variation after temporarily displaying the effect symbol is performed only once. Therefore, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167E or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167F as the use table. Variation pattern is normal PA2-4, super PA3-4, super PA3-9, super PA4-4, super PA4-9, super PA5-4, super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, special PG1 -3, special PH1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167F is used because the total re-variable display operation is executed twice after the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and then changed again. There is no need to choose as.

  The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D shown in FIGS. 53 (A) to 53 (C) and 54 (A) are effects that become the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the symbols, the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, KZ2-3. It is comprised from the data for determination etc. which are allocated to the pseudo | simulation consecutive chance eyes GC1-GC8 comprised by these combinations. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167E shown in FIG. 54B includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1 and a right temporary stop symbol determined using either the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. Depending on whether the combination of KZ2-2 and medium temporary stop symbol 2-3 is the pseudo-continuous chance GC1-GC8, the second pseudo-random temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2 is It consists of data for determination assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 constituted by a combination of the right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2 and KZ3-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167F shown in FIG. 54C includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, a right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167E. The random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is assigned to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ4-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  By determining temporary stop symbols using such temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167F, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, pseudo continuous fluctuations such as non-reach PA1-5, special PG1-5, and special PH1-5. Or the normal PA2-4, super PA3-4, super PA3-9, super PA4-4, super PA4-9, super PA5-4, super PB3-4, super PB4 -4, super PB5-4, special PG1-3, special PH1-3, or the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern of two times, super PA3-5, super PA3-10, super PA4-5, super PA4-10, Super PA5-5, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-5, Super P Depending on whether the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation such as 1-1 is a variation pattern of 3 times, all of the effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in each variation. The effect symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed can be determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  Also, super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3-9, super PA3-10, super PA4-4, super PA4-5, super PA4-9, super PA4-10, super PA5-4, super PA5- 5, super PB4-4, super PB4-5, super PB5-4, super PB5-5, super PF1-1, the variable display result is "big hit", the big hit type is "normal", "first probability change", Temporary stop symbol determination table 167B referred to in the case of either “second probability variation” or “third probability variation”, special PG1-3, special PG1-5, special PH1-3, special PH1-5, In the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167C and 167D that are referred to when the big hit type is either “fourth probability variation” or “rush accuracy” Range of random values SR4-1 of the first pseudo-communication time for the temporary stop symbol determination assigned to each chance th GC1~GC8 are different. As a result, the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, or “third probability variation”, or the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” or “surprise probability”. It is possible to determine which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is made at a different ratio depending on whether or not there is. Furthermore, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C that is referred to when the big hit type is “fourth probability variation” and the total reserved memory number is less than a predetermined number (for example, “5”), and the total reserved memory number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. Even in the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D referred to in a certain case, the range of the random value SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol assigned to each of the pseudo consecutive chance points GC1 to GC8 is different. Yes. As a result, it is possible to determine which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is made at a different ratio depending on whether the total number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number or the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. .

  In addition, in the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167C and 167D, as compared with the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol assigned to the pseudo-continuous chance GC2 is determined. The range is set wide. With such a setting, when the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the case of “fourth probability variation” and “surprise probability” is the pseudo consecutive chance Since it is easy to be determined as GC2, the player is informed that the big hit type has been determined as either “4th probability variation” or “surprise accuracy” by displaying the production symbols constituting the quasi-continuous chance GC2 temporarily. Can be suggested.

  In addition, the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167E and 167F are set so as to be easily determined at the same pseudo continuous chance as the pseudo continuous chance determined by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167B to 167D. Therefore, when the big hit type is determined to be either “fourth probability variation” or “surprising probability”, the pseudo consecutive chance GC2 is configured not only in the last pseudo continuous variation but also in the pseudo continuous variation before that. The effect symbol to be displayed is easily displayed as a temporary stop.

  Further, when the variation pattern is special PG1-3 or special PH1-3, it is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C, and the variation pattern is the special PG1. -5, special PH1-5, since it is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D, the big hit type is "fourth probability change", " In the case of “probability”, it is determined to be one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 at the same rate. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the jackpot type is determined to be “fourth probability change” or “surprise accuracy” from the production symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chances displayed as temporarily stopped. .

  Note that the temporary stop symbol determination table that is referred to when the remaining number of all re-variable display operations is “2” or “3” is super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3-9. , Super PA3-10, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-5, Super PA4-9, Super PA4-10, Super PA5-4, Super PA5-5, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-4 , Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super PB5-5, Super PF1-1 The variation determined when the jackpot type is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” Fluctuation pattern determined when the pattern or special hit type such as special PG1-3 or special PH1-3 is either "fourth probability variation" or "sudden probability" Emissions or response, may be provided respectively by the plurality. Then, the range of the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol assigned to each of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8, or the randomness for determining the third pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol. By setting the range of the numerical value SR4-3 to be different, when the effect symbols constituting the different pseudo-continuous chances are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation and the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation, The player may be informed that the jackpot type has been determined as either “fourth probability change” or “surprise”. Alternatively, when the effect symbols constituting the same pseudo-continuous chance are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first pseudo-continuous variation and the second pseudo-continuous variation, the big hit type is “4th probability variation”, “ May be suggested to the player.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination shown in FIG. 56 (A) is used as a table for determining an effect symbol that is temporarily displayed when the “development chance” specific effect is executed. A table 168 is included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 has a chance of slipping / development according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols which become the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” effect symbol display area 9L. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for time is composed of determination data assigned to the development chance items HC1 to HC8 constituted by the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3. ing.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 56 (B) as a table for determining an effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the changing promotion effect is executed. It is. The temporary stop symbol determination table 169 has the same left center right that is stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the determined effect symbols that become a big hit combination. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3, It consists of decision data assigned to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM includes, for example, symbol variation control pattern tables 180 and 181 shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 57 (A), the display area of the effect display device 9 during the period from when the variation of the effect symbol is started until the finalized symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. The data indicating the control contents of various effect operations, such as the variable display operation of the effect design in the game, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation in the specific effect, and the first half of the effect display operation in the sudden effect display, It is only necessary to store a plurality of types as patterns. Each symbol variation control pattern includes, for example, various effects according to variable display of effect symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like in time series.

  In the symbol variation control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 57 (B), during the period from when the variation of the effect symbol in the case of executing the effect during reach to when the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. The variable display operation of the effect symbol in the display area of the effect display device 9, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation in the specific effect, the first half of the effect display operation in the sudden effect display, etc. A plurality of types of data indicating the control contents of various effects operations may be stored as the symbol variation control pattern. Each symbol variation control pattern includes, for example, various effects according to variable display of effect symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like in time series.

  In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 58, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit gaming state may be stored. Each production control pattern includes, for example, various production control process timer setting values, production control process timer determination values, production display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, end codes, and the like according to the progress of production operations in the big hit gaming state. The contents of the production control, the production control switching timing, and the like may be set in time series.

  As an example, the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-1 and the hit control in progress CRE1-1 continues from the variable display of the effect symbol, and a series of surprise effect display that displays an effect image for notifying that “accuracy” will occur. After executing the latter half of the effect display operation at, the probability change entry display is executed. The effect control pattern of the hit start CST1-3 and the hit control CRD1-3 is a series of the same contents as the hit start CST2-1 and the hit control CRE1-1 effect control pattern continuously from the variable display of the effect symbol. After executing the latter half of the effect display operation in the surprise effect display, the effect display at the start of the big hit is executed. Therefore, when a series of special effects are executed during the period in which the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the content of the production control indicates whether it is controlled to the 15th round big hit state or the two round big hit state. Can not be recognized by the player.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 59 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 59 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the effect display device 9, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating flag values and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 9. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 80 determines the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 9 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 101. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 80 includes, for example, an input port for capturing various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 120, and effect control. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the substrate 80. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the effect display device 9, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

  For example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted on the voice output board 70. As an example, in the audio output board 70, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 80 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input driver and an LED driver are mounted on the lamp driver board 35. As an example, in the lamp driver board 35, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 80 is input to the LED driver via the input driver. The LED driver amplifies the electrical decoration signal and supplies it to the decoration LED 25, the frame LED 28, and the like.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the effect symbol and the variation of the effect symbol are started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the production control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the production symbol (and production symbol) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) ) Is derived and displayed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a so-called probability variation promotion effect, a probability variation promotion effect is executed when a flag indicating that the probability variation promotion effect is being executed, which indicates execution of the probability variation promotion effect, is set. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end process (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  62 and 63 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect symbol variation start process executed in step S801 of FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “lost” by reading, for example, EXT data of the variable display result notification command. At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (Y in step S501), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern changes the effect symbol variable display mode to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of "" (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (Y in step S502), the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development chance”. It is determined whether or not (step S503). As an example, if it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, if the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 (see FIG. 8), It is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development chance”.

  If it is determined in step S503 that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” (Y in step S503), the final stop symbol constituting any of the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 and A combination of determined effect symbols is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 45 (D) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1- 5, the combination of FZ1-6 is determined as a confirmed effect symbol.

  If it is determined in step S503 that it is not a variation pattern that executes the specific effect of “end of development opportunity” (N in step S503), the combination of the definite effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination Is determined (step S505). As an example, in the process of step S505, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 45 (A) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the effect symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 45 (B) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the effect symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 45C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, a random value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, on the basis of the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C.

  In this way, in the process of step S505, referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the effect symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Therefore, the combination of the confirmed effect symbols does not become a reach combination or a jackpot combination, and even if it is other than a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in (B), the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 7C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (N in step S502), a combination of definite effect symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S506). As an example, in the process of step S506, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 48A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the same effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is obtained. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 48B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the effect symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- 3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, the effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  In this way, in the process of step S506, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” and “right” other than the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. The effect symbols that are the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 9L and 9R are determined. Then, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the effect symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last, and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2- 1, the design difference with the effect design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the effect design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  If the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S501 (N in step S501), the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability change”, or the variable display result Is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, it is determined whether it is either one or the other (step S507). At this time, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “fourth probability variation”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S507). Y) The specified variation pattern is one of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-6 and special PH1-3 to special PH1-5 by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, for example. Or other than those (step S508). Here, as shown in FIG. 9, the variation pattern of special PG1-1 to special PG1-6, special PH1-3 to special PH1-5 is set to “non-reach” as the variable display mode of the production symbol. Is specified. Therefore, if it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any of special PG1-1 to special PG1-6 and special PH1-3 to special PH1-5 (Y in step S508), FIG. The process proceeds to the process of step S503 shown, and the finalized design that becomes the final stop symbol is determined by either the process of steps S504 or S505. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-6, special PH1-3 to special PH1-5, the process of step S503 shown in FIG. 62 is performed. If the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern of the special PG 1-6 (see FIG. 9), it is determined that the variation pattern executes the specific effect of “end of development chance”. It will be.

  If it is determined in step S508 in FIG. 63 that the variation pattern is other than the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-6 and special PH1-3 to special PH1-5 (N in step S508), the designated variation Determine whether the pattern is one of special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PG3-2, special PG3-3, special PH3-2, special PH3-3, or any other variation pattern (Step S509). Here, as shown in FIG. 9, the variation patterns of special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PG3-2, special PG3-3, special PH3-2, and special PH3-3 are all variable in production design. After the display state is set to the reach state, “normal” reach production is specified. Therefore, if it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is any of special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PG3-2, special PG3-3, special PH3-2, and special PH3-3. (Y of step S509), it progresses to the process of step S506 shown in FIG. 62, and the definite effect design used as the last stop symbol which comprises a reach combination is determined.

  If it is determined in step S509 in FIG. 63 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PG3-2, special PG3-3, special PH3-2, and special PH3-3 variation patterns ( N) in step S509, the designated variation pattern is either the special PG3-1 or the special PH3-1 variation pattern. Here, as shown in FIG. 9, each of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 and the special PH 3-1 is a combination of a definite production symbol that is a variable display result of the production symbol, and any one of the chance chance items TC 1 to TC 4. It is specified to do. Corresponding to the designation of any one of these special PG3-1 and special PH3-1 variation patterns, the combination of the definitive effect symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting any one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is determined. (Step S510). As an example, in the process of step S510, when the specified variation pattern is the special PG3-1, the final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 49 (D) is selected and set as the use table, and the special PH3- If there is 1, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 49C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1, FZ4-, which becomes any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4. 2, the combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed effect symbol. In the process of step S510, the special PG3-1 to the special PG3- are not referred to without referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 49C or the final stop symbol determination table 163D shown in FIG. 3. Either one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is configured in advance by setting any one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns of the special PH 3-1 to the special PH 3-3. You may make it determine the combination of the definite effect design used as the last stop design to be performed.

  In the case where the variable display result is “big hit” in step S507, if the big hit type is neither “fourth probability variation” nor “surprise accuracy” (N in step S507), the variable display result is “big hit”. In this case, it is determined whether the jackpot type is one of “ordinary jackpot” or “third probability variation” or any other (step S511). At this time, when the big hit type is “ordinary big hit”, or when the big hit type is “third probability variation” (Y in step S511), the final effect symbol which becomes the final stop symbol constituting the normal big hit combination. Is determined (step S512). As an example, in the process of step S512, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 49A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed effect design.

  If the big hit type is neither “normal” nor “third probability variation” in step S511 (N in step S511), the big hit type corresponds to either “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”. And the combination of the definite effect design which becomes the last stop design which constitutes the probability variation big hit combination is determined (step S513). As an example, in the process of step S513, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 49B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed effect design.

  62. After performing any of the processes in steps S504, S505, and S506 in FIG. 62, or after performing any of the processes in steps S510, S512, and S513 in FIG. 63, the specific effect setting process is performed (step S514). FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the specific effect setting process executed in step S514. In this specific effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern having no specific effect (step S551). At this time, if the variation pattern has no specific effect (Y in step S551), the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S551 that the variation pattern has a specific effect (N in step S551), the specific effect is either “slip” or “intro”, or other specific effects. It is determined whether or not there is (step S552). At this time, if it is any one of the specific effects “slip” and “intro”, the specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect is selected and set as the use table (step S553). As an example, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 50A is set in the case of the “slip” specific effect, and the specific effect shown in FIG. 50B in the case of the “intro” specific effect. An effect pattern determination table 164C is set.

  Following the process of step S553, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S554). For example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. To do. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is selected from any one of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A set in step S552. To decide. In the case of the “Intro” specific effect, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. At this time, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is read. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR6-3 and the previous effect buffer value, when the variation pattern is other than non-reach PA 1-6, Based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-3, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164C.

  After the determination in step S554, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is “intro” (step S555). If the specific effect is “intro” (Y in step S555), step S554 is performed. The previous effect buffer value is updated with the previous effect buffer update setting value in the specific effect pattern determination table 164C in accordance with the specific effect patterns of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 determined in (Step S556). For example, if the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “1”. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-2 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “2”. When the specific effect pattern of the intro TP3-3 is determined in step S554, the previous effect buffer value is updated to “3”.

  By executing the processing of step S556 in this way, the specific effect pattern of intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “intro” is displayed. Each time it is determined, the previous effect buffer value corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the determined intro TP3-1 to intro TP3-3 can be updated. That is, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “Intro” is determined as one of a plurality of types, the determined type of effect operation can be stored as the previous effect buffer value in an updatable manner. And in the process of step S554, when it is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA 1-6, the previous effect buffer value is read and the determination using the specific effect pattern determination table 164C as shown in FIG. Thus, the specific effect pattern can be determined so that the same type of effect operation as the type of effect operation stored as the previous effect buffer value is not executed.

  When it is determined in step S552 that the specific effect is other than “slip” or “intro” (N in step S552), or when it is determined in step S555 that the specific effect is other than “intro” (step After executing the process of step S556 (N in S555), the specific effect is any one of “slip”, “pseudo-ream”, “expansion chance”, or a specific effect other than these. Is determined (step S557). At this time, if it is a specific effect other than “slip”, “pseudo-continuous”, and “development chance” (N in step S557), the specific effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is one of the specific effects of “sliding”, “pseudo-ream”, and “expansion chance” (Y in step S557), the temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the specific effect is determined. (Step S558), the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S558, as an example, in the case of the specific effect of “slip”, the temporary stop symbol determination table is set according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 52E based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S554. One of 166A to 166D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random number SR3, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, the right temporary stop symbol 1 -3, the effect symbol which becomes any of the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 is determined.

  As another example, in the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, first, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is set to a constant M based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. For example, when the variation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-5, special PG1-5, and special PH1-5, the constant M is set to “1”, and super PA3-4, super PA3-9, super When the variation pattern is any one of PA4-4, Super PA4-9, Super PA5-4, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Special PG1-3, Special PH1-3, The constant M is set to “2”, and super PA3-5, super PA3-10, super PA4-5, super PA4-10, super PA5-5, super PB3-5, super PB4-5, super PB5-5, If the variation pattern is any of the super PF1-1, the constant M is set to “3”. At this time, a variable N indicating the determined number of temporary stop symbol combinations is set to “0”. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 53A is selected and set as a use table, while the variation pattern is super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3-9, super PA3-10, super PA4-4, super PA4-5, super PA4-9, super PA4-10, super PA5-4, super PA5-5, super PB3-4, super In the case of any of PB3-5, super PB4-4, super PB4-5, super PB5-4, super PB5-5, and super PF1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 53 (B) Select and set as the use table. When the variation pattern is special PG1-3 or special PH1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 53C is selected and set as a use table, while the variation pattern is special. In the case of either PG1-5 or special PH1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 54A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR4-1, the left middle right temporary which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 The combination of the stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167E shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167E based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3 that become one of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -2, KZ3-3 combination is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167F shown in FIG. 54C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167F based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, KZ4, which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2 and a combination of KZ4-3 are determined. After determining the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated.

  As yet another example, in the case of a specific effect of “Development Chance”, the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 56A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the extracted random value SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3, which become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8, are displayed. Determine the combination.

  After executing the specific effect setting process as described above in step S514 shown in FIG. 62, the changing promotion effect setting process is executed (step S515). FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing promotion effect setting process executed in step S515. In this changing promotion effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” or not. (Step S561). At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” (N in step S561), the changing promotion effect setting processing is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S561 that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “probable” (Y in step S561), the variation shown in FIG. The promotion effect execution determination table 165A is selected and set as a use table (step S562). Subsequently, for example, numeric data indicating the promotion effect execution determination random value SR5 is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S563). Based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S563, the jackpot type is “normal” or “first certain change” by referring to the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A set in step S562. The presence or absence of a fostering promotion effect is determined according to which one of “fourth probability change” (step S564). At this time, if it is determined that there is no changing promotion effect (N in step S565), the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S564 that there is a changing promotion effect (Y in step S565), a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the changing promotion effect is determined (step S566). Then, the changing promotion effect setting process ends. In the process of step S566, as an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 56B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR2, the effect symbols determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are displayed. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 is determined according to the symbol number.

  After executing the specific effect setting process in step S515, it is determined whether the specified variation pattern is a variation pattern with super reach, for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command (step S523). . When it is determined that the variation pattern is accompanied by super reach (Y in step S523), an effect setting process during reach is executed (step S524).

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect setting process during reach executed in step S524. In this effect setting process during reach, first, the effect control CPU 101 executes a reach notice determination process for determining whether or not to execute a reach notice (step S901).

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the reach advance notice determination process executed in step S901. In this in-reach notice determination process, first, the effect control CPU 101 sets the reach-in-preview determination table 301 for determining whether or not to execute the reach notice shown in FIG. 69A (step S911). ). The reach advance notice determination table 301 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The reaching notice determination table 301 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the reaching notice based on the random value SR10 for determining the reaching notice. In the reach advance notice determination table 301, a determination value is assigned so that the advance notice during reach is determined at a different rate depending on whether the variable display mode is “super reach lose” or “big hit”. ing.

  Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR10 for determining the advance notice during reach is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S912). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR10 extracted in step S912, by referring to the reach advance notice determination table 301 set in step S911, “non-reach lose”, “normal reach lose”, “super reach lose” , The presence / absence of the advance notice during reach is determined according to whether it is “big hit” (step S913).

  At this time, if it is determined that there is no advance notice during reach (N in step S914), the advance notice determination process during reach is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S913 that there is a reaching notice (Y in step S914), for example, a reaching notice that is provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 and indicates that a reaching notice is to be executed, for example. The execution flag is set to ON (step S915).

  Subsequently, a reaching notice pattern determination table 302 for determining a reaching notice pattern shown in FIG. 69B is set (step S916). The reach advance notice pattern determination table 302 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The reach reach notice pattern determination table 302 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the reach reach notice pattern based on the random reach value SR11 for reach notice pattern determination. In the reach notice pattern determination table 302, determination values are assigned so that the reach notice pattern is determined at a different ratio depending on whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”.

  Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR11 for determining a reaching notice pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S917). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR11 extracted in step S917, the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit” by referring to the reach notice pattern determination table 302 set in step S916. Depending on whether or not, a reach notice pattern during reach is determined (step S918). After the process in step S918, the reach advance notice determination process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 66, after the reach notice determination process in step S901 is executed, the process returns to FIG. 66 to determine whether or not the reach notice execution flag is set (step S902). If the reach advance notice execution flag is set (Y in step S902), since the reach advance notice is executed as the reach effect, it is determined that the development effect is not executed (step S904), and the reach effect setting process is performed. Exit.

  In this embodiment, the reach notice and the development effect can be executed as the effect during reach, but the execution timing of these effects is the same. Therefore, when the advance notice during reach is executed (Y in step S902), the development effect is not executed (step S904). In this way, it is possible to notify that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit by executing the advance notice during reach, and it is possible to prevent the production from overlapping with the production and to prevent the content of the production from becoming unclear .

  Note that it may be determined whether or not to execute the development effect, and when it is determined not to execute, the advance notice during reach may be executed.

  If the advance notice execution flag during reach is not set (N in step S902), an extended effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute an extended effect is executed (step S903).

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the development effect determination process executed in step S903. In the development effect determination process, first, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state is a certain change state (step S921). If the gaming state is not a probable change state (N in Step S921), it is determined whether or not it is a high base state (Step S922).

  On the side of the effect control board 80, when a display result specifying command is received, a flag for specifying a gaming state is turned on or off. The effect control CPU 101 identifies the gaming state by checking this flag. For example, when a display result specifying command for specifying the first to fourth probable big hits or suddenly promising big hits is received, when the display control specific change flag is turned on and a normal big hit is received. Then, the production control probability variation flag is turned off. Also, when a display result specifying command for specifying normal big hit, first to fourth probability variation big hit, or sudden probability variation big hit is received, the high base flag for effect control is turned on, and the end timing of the short-time state (for example, normal big hit) The high base flag is turned off when 100 variable displays have been completed.

  If the state is not the high base state (N in step S922), the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations in the designated fluctuation pattern is specified by reading the EXT data of the fluctuation pattern designation command, for example (step S924).

  If the current gaming state is a probable change state (Y in step S921), if it is a high base state (Y in step S922), or if the number of pseudo-continuous changes is 3 or more (Y in step S925) Then, it is determined that the development effect is not executed as the effect during reach (step S926), and the development effect determination process is terminated.

  The development effect is an effect of encouraging the player's expectation by making it appear that it has evolved from normal reach to super reach. However, since the ratio of normal reach is low when the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is a predetermined number or more (in this embodiment, when the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is 3, ), The production effect of the development effect that appears to have evolved from normal reach to super reach is reduced. That is, if the development effect is executed even though it is known that the super-reach is caused by the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the useless effect is executed. Accordingly, in this embodiment, the development effect is not executed when the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Thereby, useless production can be omitted and the interest of the game is improved.

  Similarly, when the gaming state is a probability change state or a high base state, the occurrence rate of normal reach is low. Thus, when the occurrence rate of normal reach is low, the effect of the development effect is low. In other words, if the development effect is executed when the occurrence rate of normal reach is low, most of the normal reach will be developed into super reach, so the player can predict the effect. End up. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the occurrence rate of normal reach is low, the development effect is not executed. Thereby, useless production can be omitted and the interest of the game is improved.

  If the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is less than 3 (N in step S925), the developed effect determination table 303 for determining whether or not to execute the developed effect shown in FIG. 70 is set (step S927). The development effect determination table 303 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The development effect determination table 303 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the development effect and a development effect pattern (development effect pattern) based on the random value SR12 for determining the development effect. . The development effect determination table 303 executes the development effect depending on whether the reach production of the super reach is the reach production α or the reach production β, and whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios are different and the development effect patterns are determined differently.

  In the setting of the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 70, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio determined to execute the development effect is higher than when the variable display result is “losing”. It has become. With such a setting, when the game state is a normal state or the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is less than a predetermined number, the player can feel the expectation of the player by the development effect, and the player becomes the development effect. Attract attention and improve the fun of the game.

  Further, in the setting of the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 70, when the variable display result is “lost”, the development effect pattern of “development after provisional stop +1” is determined rather than “development after provisional stop −1”. It has become easier. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is easier to determine the development effect pattern of “development after provisional stop + 1” than “development after provisional stop + 1”. With this setting, the reliability of “big hit” when the development effect “progress after temporary stop-1” is executed is higher than when the development effect “progress after temporary stop + 1” is executed. can do. Thereby, since the ratio which becomes a specific display result changes with the production | presentation aspects of a development effect, a player comes to pay more attention to a development effect and the interest of a game improves.

  Further, in the setting of the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 70, the determination ratio of the development effect pattern is different between the case of the reach effect α and the case of the reach effect β. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to which development effect is executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Subsequent to the process of step S927, numerical data indicating the random value SR12 for determining the developed effect is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S928). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR12 extracted in step S928, by referring to the development effect determination table 303 set in step S927, the reach effect is determined and the variable display result is “lost”. The presence / absence of the development effect and the development effect pattern are determined according to whether it is “big hit” or not (step S929).

  At this time, if it is determined that there is no development effect (N in step S930), the development effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S930 that there is a development effect (Y in step S930), a temporary stop pattern corresponding to the reach symbol is determined (step S931). In the process of step S931, which is the development effect pattern determined in step S929, and the reach symbols ("left" and "right" effect symbol display areas determined in steps S506, S512, S513) The temporary stop symbols in the “medium” effect symbol display area 9 </ b> C are determined depending on which of the symbols 9 </ b> L and 9 </ b> R is stopped and displayed. If the development effect pattern is “development after temporary stop + 1”, the effect symbol obtained by adding +1 to the reach symbol determined in steps S506, S512, and S513 becomes the temporary stop symbol in the effect symbol display area 9C. If the development effect pattern is “Development after Temporary Stop—1”, the effect symbol that is minus one of the reach symbols determined in steps S506, S512, and S513 is the temporary stop symbol in the effect symbol display area 9C. After the process of step S931, the development effect determination process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 62, when it is determined in step S523 that the variation pattern is not super-reach (N in step S523) or after the reach effect setting process in step S524 is executed, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect. The control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S516). The effect control CPU 101 uses the contents of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect pattern determined in the process of step S515, and the effect during reach (notice during reach, development effect) determined in the process of step S524. In response, one of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in symbol variation control pattern tables 180 and 181 shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B is selected as a usage pattern.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice effect setting process for determining and setting the content of the notice effect (step S517). The contents of the notice effect setting process will be described later (see FIGS. 80 and 81).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern and the content of the notice effect (step S518). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S519).

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data are collected. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. In addition, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled. Further, the movable member 78 and the effect blades 79a and 79b are controlled in a manner set in the movable member control data.

  The process table shown in FIG. 71 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each effect control pattern and notice effect. Note that the process table corresponds to the symbol variation control pattern tables 180 and 181 shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B more specifically. If it is determined in step S517 to execute the notice effect, the data corresponding to the notice effect is set, the process table is selected, and it is not decided to execute the notice effect. The process table for which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effects executed in accordance with the contents of the process table. The effect control CPU 101 executes display control according to effect control execution data in the process table. That is, when the time according to the timer value set as the process timer set value elapses, according to the next effect control execution data in the process table, the effect display device 9, the light emitter such as the LED, the speaker 27, the movable member 78, and By repeating the process of controlling the effect blades 79a and 79b, an effect in the change of the effect symbol is realized. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) is set in data (for example, movable member control data) corresponding to a production component that is not controlled during the variation period.

  When the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S519, the effect control device (the effect symbol is displayed in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1). Control of the effect display device 9 as an effect part to be variably displayed, various lamps as an effect part, the speaker 27 as an effect part, and the movable member 78 and effect blades 79a and 79b) as effect parts. Start (step S520). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Further, a drive signal for operating the movable member 78 is output in accordance with the movable member control data. Moreover, according to the movable member control data, a drive signal for operating the effect blades 79a and 79b is output.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S521), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802). (Step S522).

  Next, the contents of each notice effect in the first step-up notice will be described. FIG. 73 to FIG. 78 are explanatory diagrams showing respective notice effects in the first step-up notice.

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice effect refers to a notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect step by step from one step to a plurality of steps according to a predetermined order. In this embodiment, when the specific display result (big hit) is used, the ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages up to many stages in the step-up notice effect is higher than when the specific display result is not used. .

  Note that the step-up notice effect may be such that the shape and color of one character changes, and the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as seen from the player changes step by step. If it can be recognized as “step-up notice”, it can be said. For example, the number of characters increases stepwise, the number of characters that move stepwise, the number of times the character moves, the frequency, etc. increase stepwise, and the size of the character increases stepwise. May be. The same applies when the character is replaced with a movable member. In other words, when a plurality of movable members are provided, the number of movable members that move stepwise may be increased, or the number of times and the frequency of movement of the movable member may increase stepwise.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 to 78, in the first step-up notice, main step-up that can execute four notice effects (notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, notice effect D), and main step up And a plurality of branch step-ups for branching at a predetermined timing and executing a notice effect different from the notice effect in the main step-up.

  FIG. 73 shows examples of notice effects A to D included in the main step-up. As shown in FIG. 73, as the notice effect A, an effect is performed in which a human character A appears from the right side of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen. As the notice effect B, an effect in which a human character B appears from the right side of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect C, an effect in which a human character C appears from the right side of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect D, characters A, B, and C simultaneously appear from the left of the screen in the first system notice area 91 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and stop at the center of the screen.

  FIG. 74 shows an example of the notice effects E and F included in the first branch step-up (button branch step-up) among the plurality of branch step-ups provided. As shown in FIG. 74, when the first branch step-up is executed after branching from the main step-up, operation buttons and boxes are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 as the notice effect E. When the operation button is pressed by the player, an effect of opening the box and showing the object inside is executed as the notice effect F. As shown in FIG. 77, the first branch step-up branches after execution of the main step-up notice effect A.

  FIG. 75 shows an example of notice effects G, H1, and H2 included in the second branch step-up among a plurality of branch step-ups. As shown in FIG. 75, when the second branch step-up is executed after branching from the main step-up, an effect in which a sound like a terrestrial sound such as “go-go-go” is executed as the notice effect G. Then, as the notice effect H1, an effect that an earthquake occurs and the ground shakes and the ground breaks is executed. After that, as the notice effect H2, “Mole” comes out from the ground and the effect “Super Reach!” Is executed. As shown in FIG. 78, the second branch step-up branches during the execution of the main step-up notice effect B.

  FIG. 76 shows an example of notice effects G, I1, and I2 included in the second branch step-up among the plurality of branch step-ups. As shown in FIG. 76, when the second branch step-up is executed after branching from the main step-up, an effect in which a sound like a sound such as “go-go-go” is played as the notice effect G. This effect is the same as the effect shown in FIG. Then, an effect in which lightning occurs is executed as the notice effect I1. As shown in FIG. 78, the notice effect I1 is a notice effect that is further branched after the second branch step-up notice effect G is executed. Thereafter, an effect displayed as “Chance!” Is executed as the notice effect I2.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing each notice effect in the second step-up notice. As shown in FIG. 79, in the second step-up notice, three notice effects (notice effect X, notice effect Y, and notice effect Z) can be executed. As shown in FIG. 78, as the notice effect X, the effect that the beetle character flies from the right side of the screen in the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect Y, an effect in which the beetle character stays on the tree in the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect Z, an effect in which an image of a tree displayed in the second system notice area 92 of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is enlarged is executed. In this embodiment, the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice can be executed simultaneously in the same period.

  80 and 81 are flowcharts showing the notice effect setting process. In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 selects a notice type selection table corresponding to the contents of the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern command (step S571).

  FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram of a notice type selection table. As shown in FIG. 82, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is non-reach PA1-1, PA1-2, PA1-7, PB1-1, PC1-1, the notice type corresponding to the variation pattern. A selection table (the uppermost table in FIG. 82) is selected. In this table, the first step-up notice, the mail notice (the notice effect that receives the mail and opens the mail according to the operation of the operation button 120), the card notice (the notice effect that turns the card automatically when the card comes out) ), Moving object step-up notice (step-up notice effect for stepping up the aspect of the notice effect when the movable member 78 moves stepwise), and other system liquid crystal notice (first step-up notice and second step-up notice) A judgment value is assigned to any of the notice effects executed on the liquid crystal screens of different systems. Therefore, in the case of fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-1, PA1-2, PA1-7, PB1-1, PC1-1, the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and other systems Any of the LCD notices can be executed.

  Further, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is a non-reach fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation pattern specified in the normal state is 5 to 8 and is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a notice corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is given. A type selection table (second table in FIG. 82) is selected. In this table, determination values are assigned only to the first step-up notice. Accordingly, in the case of the non-reach PA1-3 variation pattern, only the first step-up notice can be executed.

  If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is non-reach PA1-4 in which “slip” is executed as a specific effect, a notice type selection table corresponding to the variation pattern (the third table in FIG. 82). ) Is selected. In this table, determination values are assigned to all of the first step-up notice, e-mail notice, card notice, movable object step-up notice, and other system liquid crystal notice. Therefore, in the case of the non-reach PA1-4 variation pattern, any of the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice can be executed.

  Also, the non-reach PB1-2 or non-reach PC1-2, which is a non-reach variation pattern when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is in the short-time state or the probable variation state and the number of stored storages is 5 to 8, For example, the notice type selection table (the fourth table in FIG. 82) corresponding to the variation pattern is selected. In this table, no judgment value is assigned to any notice, and a judgment value is assigned only to “no notice”. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-2 or non-reach PC1-2, any notice effect cannot be executed. In this way, the notice effect is not executed in the short-time state or the probable change state because the change time is shortened in the short-time state or the probable change state, so it is difficult to execute the notice effect. Because there is.

  In addition, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern in which “intro” is executed as a specific effect, non-reach PA1-6, super-offset PA3-3, PA3-8, PB3-3, jackpot PA4-3 , PA4-8, PA5-3, PB4-3, and PB5-3, the notice type selection table (the fifth table in FIG. 82) corresponding to the variation pattern is selected. In this table, determination values are assigned only to the first step-up notice. Therefore, in the case of non-reach PA1-6, super-offset PA3-3, PA3-8, PB3-3, jackpot PA4-3, PA4-8, PA5-3, PB4-3, PB5-3, Only one step-up notice can be executed.

  Further, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a special PG1-1, PG1-2, PG1-6, PG2-1, PG2-2, PG3-1 to PG3-3, PH3-1 to PH3- If it is 3, the notice type selection table (the sixth table in FIG. 82) corresponding to the variation pattern is selected. In this table, determination values are assigned to all of the first step-up notice, e-mail notice, card notice, movable object step-up notice, and other system liquid crystal notice. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1, PG1-2, PG1-6, PG2-1, PG2-2, PG3-1 to PG3-3, PH3-1 to PH3-3, the first step-up advance notice , E-mail notice, card notice, movable object step-up notice, and other system liquid crystal notice can be executed.

  If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a special PG1-3, PG1-4, PH1-3, or PH1-4 for sudden use, a notice type selection table (7 in FIG. 82) corresponding to the variation pattern is used. Select the table in the second row. Also in this table, determination values are assigned to all of the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-3, PG1-4, PH1-3, PH1-4, all of the first step-up notice, e-mail notice, card notice, movable object step-up notice, and other system liquid crystal notice It becomes executable.

  If the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is special PG1-5 or PH1-5 for suddenness, the notice type selection table (the seventh row table in FIG. 82) corresponding to the variation pattern is selected. . Also in this table, determination values are assigned to all of the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the special PG 1-5 and PH 1-5, any of the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice can be executed.

  Further, if the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern other than those described above, a notice type selection table (the table at the bottom in FIG. 82) corresponding to the variation pattern is selected. Also in this table, determination values are assigned to all of the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. Therefore, in this case, any of the first step-up notice, the mail notice, the card notice, the movable object step-up notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice can be executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the notice type selection random number SR7, compares the extracted random number value with the determination value in the table selected in step S571, and sets the notice type associated with the matching determination value. Then, it is determined as a notice type that can be executed by the current variation (step S572).

  As described above, one of the plurality of types of notices (first step-up notice, e-mail notice, card notice, movable object step-up notice, and other system liquid crystal notice) can be executed with this change. And decide. Then, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not to execute the notice effect of the decided notice type. The reason for this is to prevent the presentation from becoming complicated if too many announcements are executed at the same time, making it difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the announcement. is there.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first step-up notice can be executed (whether or not the notice type determined in step S572 is the first step-up notice) (step S573). If one step-up notice can be executed, the first notice setting table shown in FIGS. 83 to 88 corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step S574). Here, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 88, a table is prepared for each variation pattern shown in FIGS. Then, the production control CPU 101 selects the first notice setting table corresponding to the variation pattern by confirming the variation pattern designated by the received variation pattern command.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in the first notice setting table of the non-reach variation pattern, “step C (ie notice effect C)”, “step D (notice effect D)”, “branch steps G and H (ie notice) No determination value is assigned to “effects G, H1, H2)” and “branch steps G, I (that is, notice effects G, I1, I2)”. Therefore, when the notice effect C in the main step-up or the notice effect G in the branch step-up is executed, the occurrence of reach is confirmed.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, in the first notice setting table of the normal reach variation pattern, no determination value is assigned to “step D (that is, notice effect D)”. Therefore, when the notice effect D in the main step-up is executed, the occurrence of super reach is confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 85, also in the first notice setting table of the variation pattern (special PG1-1, etc.) selected when the suddenness or the fourth certainty change occurs, a determination value is assigned to a predetermined notice effect. ing. Therefore, the notice effect is executed even during the fluctuation based on the fluctuation pattern of the special PG 1-1 or the like. However, for “step C”, “step D”, “branch steps G and H (that is, notice effects G, H1, and H2)” and “branch steps G and I (that is, notice effects G, I1, and I2)”. Judgment value is not allocated. Accordingly, when the notice effect C in the main step-up or the notice effect G in the branch step-up is executed, no sudden big hit or fourth big odd big hit occurs. However, when a pseudo-ream occurs, even if the notice effect C in the main step-up or the notice effect G in the branch step-up is executed, a sudden big hit or a fourth probability variable big hit may occur. (See FIGS. 86 to 88).

  In the first notice setting table shown in FIG. 86, a variation pattern of one pseudo-continuous is set. In order to make it look as if two fluctuations seemed to have occurred during one fluctuation in the fluctuation pattern of one pseudo-ream, the notice effect is the notice effect at the first change and the notice effect at the second change. And the set is set.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in this example, when the notice effects E and F in the branch step up are executed as the notice effect at the first change, the notice in the branch step up as the notice effect at the second change is performed. When the notice effects E and F are executed and the notice effects G and H in the branch step up are executed as the notice effects at the first change, the notice effect in the branch step up as the notice effects at the second change are performed. G and H are configured to be easily executed. That is, the notice effect in the branch step-up that is one step-up notice effect is configured to be easily executed continuously with a plurality of fluctuations. Therefore, by executing an effect that is easily recognized as a continuous effect, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the reliability of the effect of re-variation and the notice effect, and improve the game entertainment.

  In the first notice setting table shown in FIG. 87, a variation pattern of two pseudo-continuations is set. In the quasi-continuous two-time fluctuation pattern, it appears that three fluctuations seem to have occurred during one fluctuation, so the notice effect is the notice effect at the first change and the notice effect at the second change. And the third variation notice announcement are set.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in this example, when the notice effects E and F in the branch step-up are executed as the notice effect at the first change, the notice at the second change and the third change is noticed. When the notice effects E and F in the branch step up are executed as the effects, and the notice effects G and H in the branch step up are executed as the notice effects at the first change, the second change and the third change At this time, the notice effects G and H in the branch step-up are easily executed as the notice effects. That is, the notice effect in the branch step-up that is one step-up notice effect is configured to be easily executed continuously with a plurality of fluctuations. Therefore, by executing an effect that is easily recognized as a continuous effect, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the reliability of the effect of re-variation and the notice effect, and improve the game entertainment.

  In the first notice setting table shown in FIG. 88, a variation pattern of three pseudo-series is set. In the variation pattern of the three-time quasi-continuation, it appears as if the four fluctuations seemed to have occurred during the first fluctuation, so the notice effect is the notice effect at the first change and the notice effect at the second change. And a set of a third notice notice variation and a fourth notice effect change are set.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in this example, when the notice effects E and F in the branch step-up are executed as the notice effect at the first change, the second change, the third change, and When the notice effects E and F in the branch step up are executed as the notice effect at the fourth change, and when the notice effects G and H in the branch step up are executed as the notice effect at the first change, the change 2 The notice effects G and H in the branch step-up are easily executed as the notice effects at the third time, the third change time, and the fourth change time. That is, the notice effect in the branch step-up that is one step-up notice effect is configured to be easily executed continuously with a plurality of fluctuations. Therefore, by executing an effect that is easily recognized as a continuous effect, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the reliability of the effect of re-variation and the notice effect, and improve the game entertainment.

  In general, the step-up notice effect is configured such that the reliability of occurrence of a “big hit” when the step is up is increased. In order to improve the gaming interest, a plurality of types of step-up notice effects with different degrees of reliability are prepared. For example, a player can execute a step-up notice effect according to each change due to re-change. It is conceivable to recognize that a step-up notice effect has occurred continuously. However, if the step-up notice effect that is continuously executed is changed from one step-up notice effect to the other step-up notice effect, the player will confirm that the step-up notice effect is being executed continuously. Not only is it difficult to recognize, but there is a problem that it is not possible to recognize that the reliability has been improved by changing the step-up notice effect, or that there is distrust as if the reliability has decreased. In the present embodiment, by using the tables shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, when re-variable display is performed, the branch step-up is determined as the notice effect for one period of the step-up notice effect to be executed. Then, as the notice effect for the next period, the ratio determined to branch step up is high, and when it is decided to branch step up, the notice effect for the subsequent period is also decided to branch step up, so it can be changed again. The player can easily recognize that the step-up notice effect (branch step-up) is continuously performed as the display notice effect, and the reliability of the jackpot by the step-up notice effect (branch step-up). Can be easily recognized and does not give disbelief that the reliability has been lowered.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts the first step-up notice effect determination random number SR8-1, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value of the first notice setting table selected in step S574, thereby changing the current variation. It is determined whether or not to execute the notice effect and the mode of the notice effect when the notice effect is executed (step S575). Then, control goes to a step S584.

  83 to 88, the “appearance rate” indicates the ratio at which each variation pattern is selected in the variation pattern setting process of FIG. Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern is selected as the big hit, the probability of the big hit is 1/300, and the big hit variation pattern type is determined at a predetermined ratio according to the big hit type. A variation pattern is selected at a predetermined rate from among the selected jackpot variation pattern types, and the first step-up notification is selected from a plurality of types of notification types as a notification type to be executed for the selected variation pattern. Therefore, it is obtained from 1/300 × (variation pattern type selection ratio) × (variation pattern selection ratio) × (selection ratio of first step-up notice). For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the big hit is determined, and the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, the rate at which the variation pattern of the big PA for normal PA 2-5 is selected is 1 / 300 × (selection ratio of normal CA3-1 in FIG. 13A (74/241)) × (selection ratio of variation pattern of normal PA2-5 in CA3-1 in FIG. 18 (12/251) × (FIG. 82 selection ratio (121/191) of the first step-up notice.

  In addition, the probability that the variation pattern of the loss of reach is selected has a probability of loss of 299/300, and whether or not to reach is determined. A type is selected, a variation pattern is selected at a predetermined rate from the selected variation pattern types for reach, and a first step-up notification is made from among a plurality of types of notification types as a notification type to be executed for the selected variation pattern. Is selected from 299/300 × (reach occurrence probability) × (variation pattern type selection ratio) × (variation pattern selection ratio) × (first step-up notice selection ratio). For example, when the gaming state is the normal state and the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which the variation pattern of the reach normal PA 2-1 is selected is 299/300 × (reach HA2 in FIG. 15A). -1 selection ratio (35/239))) x (selection ratio of normal CA2-1 in FIG. 16A (128/241)) x (variation pattern of normal PA2-1 in normal CA2-1 in FIG. 22) Selection ratio (148/251) × (selection ratio (121/191) of first step-up notice in FIG. 82).

  In addition, the probability that the variation pattern of non-reach is selected is 299/300, and it is determined whether or not to reach, and when it is determined not to reach, non-reach is determined at a predetermined rate. A variation pattern type is selected, a variation pattern is selected at a predetermined rate from the selected non-reach variation pattern types, and a notification type to be executed for the selected variation pattern is selected from among a plurality of types of notification types. Since 1 step up notice is selected, 299/300 × (probability of non-reach) × (variation pattern type selection ratio) × (variation pattern selection ratio) × (first step up notice selection ratio) Desired. For example, when the gaming state is a normal state and the number of reserved memories is 0, the ratio at which the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-1 is selected is 299/300 × (non-reach HA1-in FIG. 15A). 1 (selection ratio (204/239))) × (selection ratio of non-reach CA1-1 in FIG. 17A (216/241)) × (non-reach PA1-1 in non-reach CA1-1 in FIG. 21) The variation pattern selection ratio (251/251) × (selection ratio of the first step-up notice in FIG. 82 (121/191)).

  The “appearance rate” shown in FIGS. 83 to 88 is the appearance rate in the normal state when the game state is a variation pattern that can appear in any of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short time state. In the case of a variation pattern other than a variation pattern that can appear only when the number of reserved memories is a specific value (a variation pattern set according to the number of reserved memories such as a non-reach variation pattern), the number of reserved memories Is the appearance rate when is zero. Further, in the case of a variation pattern that can appear in a specific game state (probability change state or short time state), it is the appearance rate in that specific game state. Further, in the case of a variation pattern that can appear only when the number of reserved memories is a specific value, it is the appearance rate when the number of reserved memories is a specific value.

  FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance rate of each notice in the first step-up notice. FIG. 90 is an explanatory view showing the reliability of the big hit of each notice. In FIG. 89, an outlier variation pattern indicates the appearance rate when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the normal state, and the big hit variation pattern indicates the appearance rate in the normal state.

  The appearance rate of each notice (each step) in the first step-up notice shown in FIG. 89 is obtained as follows. First, the appearance rate of each notice is calculated for each of the deviation variation patterns that can appear when the number of reserved storages is 0 in the normal state. For example, as shown in FIG. 83, in the case of normal PA2-1, the appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern is 4.571% (= 0.04571). Then, determination values 1 to 200 are assigned to “none”, determination values 201 to 400 are assigned to “step A”, determination values 401 to 450 are assigned to “step B”, and “ Determination values 451 to 455 are assigned to “step C”, determination values 456 to 495 are assigned to “branch steps E and F”, and determination values 496 to 500 are assigned to “branch steps G and H”. Assigned. Therefore, the appearance rate of “none” is obtained as 0.04571 × 200/500, the appearance rate of “step A” is obtained as 0.04571 × 200/500, and the appearance rate of “step B” is 0.04571. × 50/500, the appearance rate of “Step C” is determined as 0.04571 × 5/500, the appearance rate of “Branch Steps E and F” is determined as 0.04571 × 40/500, “ The appearance rate of the branch step G, H ”is obtained as 0.04571 × 5/500.

  Moreover, the appearance rate of each notice is calculated for each of the big hit variation patterns that can appear in the normal state. For example, as shown in FIG. 84, in the case of normal PA 2-5, the appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern is 0.00625% (= 0.0000625). Then, determination values 1 to 100 are assigned to “none”, determination values 101 to 300 are assigned to “step A”, and determination values 301 to 370 are assigned to “step B”. Determination values 371 to 400 are assigned to “step C”, determination values 401 to 460 are assigned to “branch steps E and F”, and determination values 461 to 480 are assigned to “branch steps G and H”. The determination values 481 to 500 are assigned to “branch steps G and I”. Therefore, the appearance rate of “None” is calculated as 0.0000625 × 100/500, the appearance rate of “Step A” is calculated as 0.0000625 × 200/500, and the appearance rate of “Step B” is 0.0000625. X70 / 500, the appearance rate of “Step C” is obtained as 0.0000625 × 30/500, the appearance rate of “branch steps E and F” is obtained as 0.0000625 × 60/500, “ The appearance rate of “branch steps G and H” is obtained as 0.0000625 × 20/500, and the appearance rate of “branch steps G and I” is obtained as 0.0000625 × 20/500.

  Next, for each notice effect (“none” “step A” “step B” “step C” “step D” “branch steps E and F” “branch steps G and H” “branch steps G and I”) The total (NH, AH, BH, CH, DH, EH, HH, IH) is calculated by adding up the appearance rates of the respective variation patterns that can appear at the time of deviation. Also, for each notice effect (“none” “step A” “step B” “step C” “step D” “branch steps E and F” “branch steps G and H” “branch steps G and I”) In this case, the total (NA, AA, BA, CA, DA, EA, HA, IA) is calculated by adding up the appearance ratios of the variation patterns that can appear.

  The reliability (%) of each notice (each step) in the first step-up notice shown in FIG. 90 is obtained as follows. That is, in the case of “None”, NA / (NH + NA) × 100, the calculation formula of “Step A”, in the case of “Step A”, the calculation formula of AA / (AH + AA) × 100, and in the case of “Step B”, BA / (BH + BA) × 100, CA in the case of “Step C”, CA / (CH + CA) × 100, in the case of “Step D”, DA / (DH + DA) × 100, “Branch step E , F ”, EA / (EH + EA) × 100 formula,“ branch step G, H ”, HA / (HH + HA) × 100 formula, and“ branch step G, I ”, IA / The reliability can be obtained from the formula (IH + IA) × 100.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, the reliability in the case of “none” is “0.115230481”, the reliability in the case of “step A” is “0.3188880209”, and “step The reliability in the case of “B” is “0.38193149”, the reliability in the case of “Step C” is “1.893339804”, and the reliability in the case of “Step D” is “5.914387”. Yes, the reliability in the case of “branch step E, F” is “0.412419178”, the reliability in the case of “branch step G, H” is “2.8155565359”, and the “branch step G, I In the case of "", the reliability is "5.14643999".

  From the above, the reliability in the “branch steps E and F” is higher than the reliability in the “step B”. That is, branch step-up branching after step A for main step-up notice is executed than when step B (notice effect B) is executed after step A (notice effect A) for main step-up is executed. When steps E and F (notice effects E and F) are executed, it means that the reliability of the jackpot is higher. According to such a configuration, as in the case of the branch step-up notice, the case where the branch step-up notice is executed is larger than the case where the main step-up notice is completed at step B executed after step A. Since the possibility is high, the player has great expectation when diverging, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the reliability in the case of “step C” is higher than the reliability in the case of “branch steps E and F”. That is, after step A (notice effect B) of main step-up is executed, step B (notice effect B) is executed, and further, step C (notice effect C) is executed. This means that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the branch steps E and F (notification effects E and F) of the branch step up are executed after step A is executed. According to such a configuration, when step B is executed after step A in the main step-up notice, the reliability is lower than when branch steps E and F of branch step-up are executed. When step C is executed after B, the reliability is higher than when branch steps E and F of the branch step up are executed. Therefore, even if the step up does not branch, the expectation of the big hit is long. It can be maintained, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  The reliability in the case of “branch steps G and H” and “branch steps G and I” is higher than the reliability in the case of “branch steps E and F”. That is, the program branches after step A of the main step-up notice is executed and branches in the middle of step B of the main step-up notice, compared to the case where the branch steps E and F (notice effects E and F) are executed. When branch steps G and H (notice effects G and H) and branch steps G and I (notice effects G and I) are executed, it means that the reliability of the jackpot is higher. According to such a configuration, since the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the branch timing is late, it is possible to maintain the expectation of whether or not to branch for a long time, and to further improve the interest of the game Can do.

  Furthermore, the reliability in the case of “branch steps G and I” is higher than the reliability in the case of “branch steps G and H”. According to such a configuration, when branching from the main step-up notice and further branching from the branch step-up, it means that the reliability of the big hit is higher, and the expectation for the branch can be enhanced.

  In addition, the reliability of this time has been described in detail with respect to the reliability when the gaming state is the normal state and the reserved memory number is 0 as an example. The same applies to the case where is in the probability variation state or the short time state.

  If it is determined in step S573 that the first step-up notice cannot be executed (N in step S573), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the e-mail notice can be executed (that is, as the notice type in step S572). It is determined whether or not an e-mail notice has been determined (step S576). When it is determined that the mail notice can be executed, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the mail notice determination random number SR8-4, and based on the extracted random number value, the mail notice selection table shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. The mode (contents) of the mail notice is determined using the mail message determination table shown in FIG. 94 (step S577). Then, control goes to a step S584. Hereinafter, processing for determining the mode (contents and pattern) of the mail notice will be described.

  FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a notice selection table as a data table used to select a table used when determining a mail notice pattern.

  91A shows a big hit mail notice selection table. In FIG. 91, (B) shows an email notice selection table at the time of reach failure. 91 (C) shows a non-reach out-of-reach email notice selection table. These notice selection tables are all stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100.

  The jackpot e-mail notice selection table shown in (A) shows a specific notice pattern when a button notice is determined as a notice pattern type when a big hit fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display result of “big hit” is designated. This is a data table for selecting a mail message determination table as a notice pattern determination table used for determination of a message. In the big hit mail notice selection table, data is set so that a different mail message determination table is selected according to the number of pseudo-runs performed in the variation pattern designated by the effect control command.

  Specifically, in the jackpot mail notice selection table shown in (A), the mail message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern that does not become a pseudo-ream (hereinafter referred to as no pseudo-ream) is designated, the first mail message determination table 201A shown in FIG. 92 is selected.

  In addition, when a variation pattern for performing one quasi-continuation is designated, the second mail message determination table 201B shown in FIG. 92 is selected in order to determine a notice pattern at the first variation (at the first variation), The third mail message determination table 201C shown in FIG. 92 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change).

  In addition, when a variation pattern that performs two pseudo-continuations is designated, a fourth mail message determination table 201D shown in FIG. 92 is selected to determine a notice pattern at the time of the first variation (at the first variation), The fifth mail message determination table 201E shown in FIG. 92 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), and the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of change) is determined. The sixth mail message determination table 201F shown in FIG. 92 is selected.

  In addition, when a variation pattern that performs three pseudo-continuations is designated, a seventh mail message determination table 201G shown in FIG. 92 is selected to determine a notice pattern for the first variation (at the first variation), The eighth mail message determination table 201H shown in FIG. 92 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change), and the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of change) is determined. 92 is selected, and the tenth mail message determination table 201J shown in FIG. 92 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change (at the time of re-change).

  The reach failure notification notice table shown in (B) is specific when a button advance notice is determined as a notice pattern type when a reach deviation change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach miss” is specified. This is a data table for selecting a mail message determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the out-of-reach e-mail notice selection table, data is set so that different e-mail message determination tables are selected according to the number of pseudo-reams performed in the variation pattern specified by the effect control command.

  In the out-of-reach e-mail notice selection table shown in (B), specifically, the e-mail message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the first mail message determination table 211A shown in FIG. 93 is selected.

  Also, when the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-continuous two times is designated, the second mail message determination table 211B shown in FIG. 93 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first fluctuation (at the first fluctuation), and the second time 93 is selected in order to determine the notice pattern at the time of change (at the time of re-change), and the third mail message determination table 211C shown in FIG. 93 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of re-change). The fourth mail message determination table 211D shown in 93 is selected.

  In addition, when the variation pattern of the fourth pseudo-continuation is designated, the fifth mail message determination table 211E shown in FIG. 93 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first variation (at the first variation), and the second time The sixth mail message determination table 211F shown in FIG. 93 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of change (at the time of re-change), and the notice pattern at the time of the third change (at the time of change) is selected. A seventh mail message determination table 211G shown in FIG. 93 is selected, and an eighth mail message determination table 211H shown in FIG. 93 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the fourth change (at the time of re-change).

  The non-reach miss e-mail notice selection table shown in (C) indicates that when a non-reach miss change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “non-reach miss” is designated, a button notice is determined as the notice pattern type. This is a data table for selecting a mail message determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach out-of-reach e-mail notice selection table, data is set so that a different e-mail message determination table is selected according to the number of pseudo-reams performed in the variation pattern designated by the effect control command.

  In the non-reach out-of-reach email notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the email message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when the variation pattern “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the first mail message determination table 221A shown in FIG. 94 is selected.

  In addition, when the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous once” is designated, the second mail message determination table 221B shown in FIG. 94 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the first variation (at the first variation), The third mail message determination table 221C shown in FIG. 94 is selected to determine the notice pattern at the time of the second change (at the time of re-change).

  Next, the contents of the first mail message determination table 201A to the tenth mail message determination table 201J used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first mail message determination table 201A to the tenth mail message determination table 201J.

  In FIG. 92, (A) to (J) show the first mail message determination table 201A to the tenth mail message determination table 201J. In each mail message determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the mail notice determination random number SR8-4 and the display contents of the selected notice message (notice message in the figure) is shown.

  In the first mail message determination table 201A in (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, "...", "CHANCE", "REACH", " A setting is made so that any one of the notice messages of “Intense heat”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is “no pseudo-ream”, one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  In the second mail message determination table 201B of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “. And “GOOD LUCK” are selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the first variation when the variation pattern is “one pseudo-ream”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense fever”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  In the third mail message determination table 201C of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ A setting is made so that any one of the notice messages of “Intense heat”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the fluctuation pattern of “one pseudo-ream”, one of these messages is selected and displayed as the notice message.

  However, regarding the third mail message determination table 201C, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected last time, For the second (this time) change of “Time”, a prohibition process that prohibits the selection of a notice effect with a lower degree of reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “Pseudo Series 1” (notice message) Forbidden processing). For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the second mail message determination table 201B in the first (previous) variation of “pseudo-continuation once”, the second (current) variation of “pseudo-continuation once” , A prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” Having a low reliability is not selected.

  The contents of the prohibition processing of such a notice message are as follows, for example. When a notice message as a notice pattern is determined when executing pseudo-variable display, the previous notice message data for specifying the decided notice message is stored in the previous notice message storage area of the RAM as data indicating the previous notice pattern. (Update storage). Then, when executing the next fluctuation display in the pseudo-ream, the previous notice message specified by the previous notice message data and the trust that becomes the big hit for the current selection notice message selected using the third mail message determination table 201C Compare degrees. When the selected notice message is lower in reliability than the previous notice message, the previous notice message is determined as the notice message in the next fluctuation display so that the notice message having lower reliability than the previous fluctuation display is not decided. . On the other hand, when the reliability of the current selection notice message is equal to or higher than the reliability of the previous notice message, the current selection notice message is determined as the notice message in the next variable display. Specifically, the comparison of the reliability that becomes a big hit about the notice pattern in the prohibition processing as described above is performed as follows. For each of the types of notice messages, for example, flags having different numerical values are associated with each other in advance (for example, the flag value is set so that the higher the reliability that is a big hit, the larger the numerical value). The flag corresponding to the type of the notice message is set as data indicating the previous notice message. Then, the flag set as the previous notice message is compared with the flag corresponding to the notice message in the current fluctuation, and based on the magnitude relationship of the numerical value of the flag, whichever is the selected notice message or the previous notice message Judge whether reliability is high.

  In the fourth mail message determination table 201D of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the first fluctuation when the fluctuation pattern is “2 pseudo-continuous times”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  In the fifth mail message determination table 201E of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “hot”, and , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  However, with respect to the fifth mail message determination table 201E, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuation 2” is set. For the second time (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous 2 times”. . For example, when “CHANCE” is selected on the basis of the fourth mail message determination table 201D for the first (previous) change of “pseudo continuous twice”, the second (current) of “pseudo continuous twice” is selected. In the fluctuation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” With low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as the prohibition process, the notice message prohibition process having the above-described content is performed on the fifth mail message determination table 201E.

  In the sixth mail message determination table 201F of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ A setting is made so that any one of the notice messages of “Intense heat”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Accordingly, in the third variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, any one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  However, for the sixth mail message determination table 201F, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected last time, For the third time (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous 2 times”. . For example, when “CHANCE” is selected based on the fifth mail message determination table 201E in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous twice”, the third (current) of “pseudo-continuous twice” is selected. In the fluctuation, a prohibition process is performed to change the setting so that “...” Having a low reliability is not selected. Specifically, as the prohibition process, the notice message prohibition process having the above-described contents is performed on the sixth mail message determination table 201F.

  In the seventh mail message determination table 201G of (G), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, In addition, a setting is made so that any one of the “GOOD LUCK” notice messages is selected. Therefore, in the first variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, any one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  In the eighth mail message determination table 201H of (H), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “. , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “Pseudo three times”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  However, with respect to the eighth mail message determination table 201H, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-ream 3” is set. For the second (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. .

  In the ninth mail message determination table 201I of (I), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense fever”, and , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the third variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  However, with respect to the ninth mail message determination table 201I, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 For the third time (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect having a lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. .

  In the tenth mail message determination table 201J of (J), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ A setting is made so that any one of the notice messages of “Intense heat”, “FEVER”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Accordingly, in the fourth variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  However, with respect to the tenth mail message determination table 201J, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected last time, For the 4th (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit the selection of the advancement effect having a lower reliability than the notification effect selected in the 3rd (previous) change of “3 pseudo-reams”. .

  Next, the contents of the first mail message determination table 211A to the eighth mail message determination table 211H used when the fluctuation display result is out of reach will be described. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first mail message determination table 211A to the eighth mail message determination table 211H.

  In FIG. 93, (A) to (H) show the first mail message determination table 211A to the eighth mail message determination table 211H. In each mail message determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8-4 and the display content of the notice message to be selected (the notice message in the figure) is shown.

  In the first mail message determination table 211A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ A setting is made so that a notice message of any one of “Intense heat” and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is “no pseudo-ream”, one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  In the second mail message determination table 211B of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the first fluctuation when the fluctuation pattern is “2 pseudo-continuous times”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  In the third mail message determination table 211C of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense fever”, and , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  However, regarding the third mail message determination table 211C, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuation 2” is set. For the second time (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous 2 times”. .

  In the fourth mail message determination table 211D of (D), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ A setting is made so that a notice message of any one of “Intense heat” and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Accordingly, in the third variation in the variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous twice”, any one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  However, regarding the fourth mail message determination table 211D, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected last time, For the third time (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous 2 times”. .

  In the fifth mail message determination table 211E of (E), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “extreme heat”, In addition, a setting is made so that any one of the “GOOD LUCK” notice messages is selected. Therefore, in the first variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, any one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  In the sixth mail message determination table 211F of (F), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “. , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “Pseudo three times”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  However, regarding the sixth mail message determination table 211F, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-ream 3” is set. For the second (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. .

  In the seventh mail message determination table 211G of (G), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and , “GOOD LUCK” is selected, and other warning messages are set not to be selected. Therefore, in the third variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, “Intense heat”, and “GOOD LUCK” is selected as the notice message. Displayed.

  However, regarding the seventh mail message determination table 211G, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 3 For the third time (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect having a lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the second (previous) change of “pseudo-three times”. .

  In the eighth mail message determination table 211H of (H), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4, “...”, “CHANCE”, “REACH”, “ A setting is made so that a notice message of any one of “Intense heat” and “GOOD LUCK” is selected. Accordingly, in the fourth variation when the variation pattern is “3 pseudo-reams”, one of these messages is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  However, regarding the eighth mail message determination table 211H, in order to prevent the reliability that the jackpot gaming state is achieved after the notice effect is executed, compared to the notice effect selected last time, For the 4th (current) change of “Time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit the selection of the advancement effect having a lower reliability than the notification effect selected in the 3rd (previous) change of “3 pseudo-reams”. .

  Next, the contents of the first mail message determination table 221A to the third mail message determination table 221C used when the fluctuation display result is out of reach will be described. FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first mail message determination table 221A to the third mail message determination table 221C.

  In FIG. 94, first mail message determination table 221A to third mail message determination table 221C are shown in (A) to (C). In each mail message determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8-4 and the display content of the notice message to be selected (the notice message in the figure) is shown.

  In the first mail message determination table 221A of (A), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, one of “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4. A notice message is selected and other notice messages are not selected. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-ream” that is out of reach, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as a notice message.

  In the second mail message determination table 221B of (B), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, one of “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4. A notice message is selected and other notice messages are not selected. Therefore, in the first fluctuation in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “non-reach” “pseudo-continuous once”, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as the notice message.

  In the third mail message determination table 221C of (C), as shown in the numerical value setting of SR8-4, one of “...” And “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-4. A notice message is selected and other notice messages are not selected. Therefore, in the second fluctuation in the case of the non-reach deviation “pseudo-continuous once” fluctuation pattern, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as the notice message.

  However, regarding the third mail message determination table 221C, in order to prevent the reliability of the big hit gaming state after the notice effect has been executed compared to the previously selected notice effect, the “pseudo-continuous 1 For the second (current) change of “time”, a prohibition process is performed to prohibit selection of the notice effect with lower reliability than the notice effect selected in the first (previous) change of “pseudo-continuous”. .

  For each mail message determination table as described above, the upper limit value of the random number used for the selection determination of the notice message is set differently for the first change, the second change, and the third change. May be. By doing so, it is possible to vary the selection distribution.

  If it is determined in step S576 that the e-mail notice cannot be executed (N in step S576), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the card notice can be executed (that is, the card notice is set as the notice type in step S572). It is determined whether or not it has been determined (step S578). If it is determined that the card notice can be executed, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the mail notice determination random number SR8-5, and based on the extracted random number value, the card notice selection table shown in FIG. A mode (contents) of card notice is determined using the card message determination table shown in FIG. 98 (step S579). Then, control goes to a step S584. Hereinafter, processing for determining the mode (contents and pattern) of the card notice will be described.

  FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a notice selection table as a data table used for selecting a table used when determining a card notice pattern. 95A shows a big hit card notice selection table. (B) shows a card advance notice selection table at the time of a loss of reach. (C) shows a card notice selection table at the time of non-reach.

  The jackpot card notice selection table shown in (A) shows a specific notice pattern when a card notice is determined as the notice pattern type when a big hit fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “hit” is designated. It is a data table for selecting the card message determination table as a notice pattern determination table used for determination of this. In the big hit card notice selection table, data is set so as to select a different card message determination table in accordance with the number of pseudo-reams performed in the variation pattern designated by the effect control command.

  Specifically, in the jackpot card notice selection table shown in (A), the card message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when the variation pattern “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the first card message determination table 203A shown in FIG. 96 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “simulation sequence once” is designated among the variation patterns to be a pseudo sequence, in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first and second variations, FIG. 96 shows. The second card message determination table 203B is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 2 times” is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuous, FIG. 96 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns for the first to third variations. The third card message determination table 203C is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated among the variation patterns that are pseudo-continuous, FIG. 96 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fourth variations. The fourth card message determination table 203D is selected.

  The reach failure card advance notice selection table shown in (B) is specific when a card advance notice is determined as the advance notice pattern type when a reach away change pattern in which the fluctuation display result is “reach miss” is specified. It is a data table for selecting the card message determination table used for determination of a detailed notice pattern. In the out-of-reach card notice selection table, data is set so that different card message determination tables are selected according to the number of pseudo-reams performed in the variation pattern specified by the effect control command.

  Specifically, in the out-of-reach card notice selection table shown in (B), the card message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when a variation pattern of “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the first card message determination table 213A shown in FIG. 97 is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous two times” is designated among the variation patterns that become pseudo-continuous, FIG. 97 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to third variations. The second card message determination table 213B is selected. In addition, when a variation pattern of “pseudo-continuous 3 times” is designated among the variation patterns that are pseudo-continuous, FIG. 97 shows in order to collectively determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first to fourth variation. The third card message determination table 213C is selected.

  The non-reach out-of-reach card notice selection table shown in (C) indicates that when a non-reach out-of-flight variation pattern with a fluctuation display result of “non-reach out” is designated, a card notice is determined as a notice pattern type. This is a data table for selecting a card message determination table used for determining a specific notice pattern. In the non-reach off button notice selection table, data is set so that a different card message determination table is selected according to the number of pseudo-runs performed in the variation pattern specified by the effect control command.

  In the non-reach off button notice selection table shown in (C), specifically, the card message determination table is selected as follows. For example, when the variation pattern “no pseudo-ream” is designated, the first card message determination table 223A shown in FIG. 98 is selected. In addition, when the variation pattern “pseudo continuous once” is designated, the second card message determination table 223B shown in FIG. 98 is used to collectively determine the respective notice patterns at the time of the first and second variations. Selected.

  Next, the contents of the first card message determination table 203A to the fourth card message determination table 203D used when the variable display result is a big hit will be described. FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first card message determination table 203A to the fourth card message determination table 203D. In the case of a card notice, the notice message is selected and used from among “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER”.

  In FIG. 96, the first card message determination table 203A to the fourth card message determination table 203D are shown in (A) to (D). In each card message determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8-5, the display content of the selected notice message (the notice message in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number) is shown. ing.

  In the first card message determination table 203A in (A), one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 1-1 to 1-3 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. The first card message determination table 203A is set so that any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected as the first notice message. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of “no quasi-continuous”, any one of “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected and displayed as the notice message.

  In the second card message determination table 203B in (B), any of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 2-1 to 2-5 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the second card message determination table 203B, a setting is made so that, in the first fluctuation, either a notice message “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. Has been. In addition, for the second fluctuation, setting is made such that any of the notice messages “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. ing.

  In the third card message determination table 203C in (C), any one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 3-1 to 3-7 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the third card message determination table 203C, a notice message of “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5 in each of the first and second fluctuations. It is set to be. In addition, for the third change, a setting is made so that one of the notice messages “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. ing.

  In the fourth card message determination table 203D in (D), one of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 4-1 to 4-9 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the fourth card message determination table 203D, in each of the first to third fluctuations, a notice message of “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. It is set to be. In addition, the fourth change is set so that any of the notice messages “...”, “CHANCE”, and “FEVER” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. ing.

  Next, the contents of the first card message determination table 213A to the third card message determination table 213C used when the fluctuation display result is out of reach will be described. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first card message determination table 213A to the third card message determination table 213C.

  97, (A) to (C) show a first card message determination table 213A to a third card message determination table 213C. In each card message determination table, the relationship between the extracted value of the random number SR8-5, the display content of the selected notice message (the notice message in the figure), and the setting pattern number (the notice pattern setting number) is shown. ing.

  In the first card message determination table 213A of (A), one of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 5-1 to 5-2 are attached is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the first card message determination table 213A, a setting is made such that either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected as the first notice message. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern “no quasi-continuous”, either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected and displayed as the notice message.

  In the second card message determination table 213B in (B), any of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 6-1 to 6-4 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the second card message determination table 213B, in each of the first to third fluctuations, a notice message of “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. It is set to be.

  In the third card message determination table 213C in (C), any one of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 7-1 to 7-5 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the third card message determination table 213C, a notice message of “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5 in each of the first to fourth changes. It is set to be.

  Next, the contents of the first card message determination table 223A to the second card message determination table 223B used when the fluctuation display result is out of reach will be described. FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the first card message determination table 223A to the second card message determination table 223B.

  In the first card message determination table 223A of (A), one of the notice patterns to which the set pattern numbers 8-1 to 8-2 are assigned is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the first card message determination table 223A, a setting is made so that either “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected as the first notice message.

  In the second card message determination table 223B of (B), any of the notice patterns assigned with the set pattern numbers 9-1 to 9-3 is selected and determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5. In the second card message determination table 223B, the notice message “...” Or “CHANCE” is selected based on the extracted value of the random number SR8-5 in the first and second fluctuations. It is set to be.

  When it is determined in step S578 that the e-mail notice cannot be executed (N in step S578), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the movable object step-up notice can be executed (that is, as the notice type in step S572). It is determined whether or not the movable object step-up notice has been determined (step S580). If it is determined that the movable object step-up notice can be executed, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the movable object step-up notice determination random number SR8-3, and based on the extracted random number value, the possible control shown in FIG. Using the animal notice selection table, the mode (contents) of the movable object step-up notice is determined (step S581). Then, control goes to a step S584. Hereinafter, processing for determining the content (presence / absence, mode) of the movable object step-up notice will be described.

  The movable object step-up notice effect is a notice effect that changes the operation mode of the movable member 78 stepwise from one step to a plurality of steps according to a predetermined order. For example, a notice effect such that the number of times the movable member 78 moves is increased stepwise (the first step (first stage) is the movable member 78 is moved once, and the next step (second stage) is the movable member 78 is moved. This is an effect in which the movable member 78 moves three times in the second step (third stage). It should be noted that the range of movement of the movable member 78 changes stepwise (in the first step, the movable member 78 moves in a narrow range, and in the next step, the movable member 78 moves in a medium range). In the next step, the movable member 78 may change so as to move in a wide range). Further, when a plurality of movable members are provided, the number of movable members that move stepwise may be increased, and the speed and frequency of movement of the movable member may increase stepwise. In this embodiment, when the specific display result (big hit) is used, the notice effect that changes the operation mode of the movable member 78 step by step is executed up to a higher stage in the movable object step-up notice effect than when the specific display result is not used. The ratio to do becomes high.

  The movable object notice selection table shown in FIG. 99 is provided with a table at the time of disconnection and a table at the time of a big hit. In the movable object notice selection table for detachment and the movable object notice selection table for big hits, only the notice effect “none” and the notice effect K (for example, an effect in which the movable member 78 is rotated once) are executed (“ K "development pattern), an effect mode (e.g.," K → L "development pattern) in which a notice effect L (an effect in which the movable member 78 rotates twice) is executed after the notice effect K is executed, and a notice effect. An effect mode (an extension pattern of “K → L → M”) in which the notice effect L is executed after K is executed, and then the notice effect M (for example, an effect in which the movable member 78 rotates three times) is executed. Is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode. The numbers shown in “Allocation” indicate the number of determination values assigned to each effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 99, in the movable object notice selection table, “None” is selected at a higher probability than when a big hit is made, and “K → “L” and “K → L → M” are selected with high probability.

  In step S581, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the movable object step-up notice determination random number SR8-3, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the movable object notice determination table. Then, the presence / absence of the moving object step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “K”, “K → L”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  When it is determined in step S580 that the movable object step-up advance notice is not executable (N in step S580), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the other system liquid crystal advance notice can be executed (that is, in step S572). Whether or not another system liquid crystal notice is determined as the type is determined (step S582). When it is determined that the other system liquid crystal notice can be executed, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the random number SR8-8 for determining the other system liquid crystal, and based on the extracted random number value, the other system liquid crystal shown in FIG. Using the notice selection table, the presence / absence of another system liquid crystal notice is determined (step S583). Then, control goes to a step S584. Hereinafter, processing for determining the presence / absence of another system liquid crystal notice will be described.

  The effect control CPU 101 uses the other system liquid crystal notice selection table shown in FIG. 101 to determine the presence / absence of another system liquid crystal notice effect (notice effect of another system different from other notices such as step-up notice and button notice). (Step S583). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The other system liquid crystal notice selection table is used to determine the content (presence / absence, production mode) of the other system liquid crystal notice, and when the big hit, the other system liquid crystal notice selection table is used for the big hit. Determine the content of the production.

  In this embodiment, the other system liquid crystal notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but a predetermined image (character image or button notice (e-mail notice, card notice) appearing in the step-up notice on the display screen of the effect display device 9. ) And an image different from the mini character image) are displayed at a predetermined timing to notify that there is a possibility of a big hit. That is, the other system liquid crystal notice effect is not a notice effect that changes a predetermined image once or a plurality of times on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  The other-system liquid crystal notice selection table shown in FIG. 101 is provided with a table for loss and a table for jackpot. In each other system liquid crystal notice selection table, a notice effect “none” and a notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. It should be noted that the determination value is set so that the probability of execution of the other system liquid crystal notice effect is higher in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss.

  In step S583, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-8 for determining the other system liquid crystal notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the other system liquid crystal notice selection table. . Then, the presence / absence of the other-system liquid crystal notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  In step S584, the effect control CPU 101 determines the contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the second step-up notice effect using the second notice setting table shown in FIG. 100 (step S584).

  In this embodiment, as described above (see FIG. 79), the content of the second step-up notice effect is stepped on the background image in the display area (second system notice area) at the top of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is directed to make changes (development, conversion).

  In step S584, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command, and selects the second notice setting table corresponding to the variation pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100, a non-reach PA1-6 fluctuation pattern, a non-reach fluctuation pattern other than non-reach PA1-6, a super PA3-3, a super PA3-8, and a super Variation pattern of PB3-3, variation pattern other than Super PA3-3, Super PA3-8 and Super PB3-3 at the time of reach lag, Super PA4-3, Super 4-8, Super PA5-3 at big hit, The variation pattern of Super PB4-3 and Super PB5-3, the second corresponding to the variation pattern other than Super PA4-3, Super 4-8, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3 and Super PB5-3 at the time of big hit Select the notice setting table. As shown in FIG. 100, in the second notice setting table, the notice effect “none”, the effect mode in which only the notice effect X is executed (the development pattern of “X”), and the notice after the notice effect X is executed. An effect mode in which the effect Y is executed (the development pattern of “X → Y”) and an effect mode in which the notice effect Y is executed after the notice effect X is executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed (“X → Y”) The development pattern of “→ Z”) and the production mode (the development pattern of “X → Z”) in which the screen is turned off after the notice effect X is executed and then the notice effect Z is executed are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode. As shown in FIG. 100, in the case of a variation pattern in which the specific effect “intro” is not executed, since the determination value is not assigned to “X → Y → Z” or “X → Z”, the notice effect Z is Never executed.

  In step S584, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence or absence of a frame (lamp) notice effect using the frame (lamp) notice setting table shown in FIG. 101 (step S585). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table, and the contents of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table for big hits in the case of a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by lighting the frame lamp 28 with a predetermined lighting pattern. In other words, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) the lighting pattern step by step once or a plurality of times). The specific contents of the frame notice effect will be omitted.

  The frame advance notice setting table shown in FIG. 101 is provided with a table for loss and a table for big hit. In each frame notice setting table, a notice effect “none” and a frame notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the probability of executing the frame notice effect is higher in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss.

  In step S585, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-6 for determining the frame notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the frame notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the frame notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence or absence of the mini character notice effect using the mini character notice setting table shown in FIG. 102 (step S586).

  In this embodiment, six types of mini character notice effects are provided, and six mini character notice setting tables corresponding to six kinds of mini character notices are prepared. Then, it is determined whether or not six kinds of mini characters appear. The types of mini characters include a mini character (first mini character) that can appear with a high probability at the time of a big hit, a mini character (second mini character) that can appear with a high probability when the variation pattern is a development opportunity, and a variation pattern. A mini character that can appear with a high probability at the time of (3rd mini character), a mini character that can appear with a high probability at the time of a probable big hit (fourth mini character), and a high probability of appearing when the variation pattern is a sliding big hit There are provided a mini character (fifth mini character) and a mini character (sixth mini character) that can appear with a high probability when the variation pattern is intro.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the first mini character notice setting table for determining the presence or absence of the first mini character is provided with a table at the time of losing and a table at the time of big hit. In the mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “appear” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “appearance”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability (appearance probability) of the first mini character notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss. In step S586, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR9-1 for determining the first mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first mini character notice effect (whether or not to appear) is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “appearance”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  In addition, the second mini character notice setting table for determining the presence or absence of the second mini character is provided with a table for “other than development chance” and a table for “expansion chance”. In the mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “appear” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “appearance”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability (appearance probability) of the second mini-character notice effect is higher in the case of “the development chance” than in the case of “other than the development opportunity”. In step S586, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR9-2 for determining the second mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second mini character notice effect (whether or not to appear) is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “appearance”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  In addition, the third mini character notice setting table for determining the presence or absence of the third mini character is provided with a table for “other than pseudo-ream” and a table for “pseudo-ream”. In the mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “appear” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “appearance”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set such that the execution probability (appearance probability) of the third mini-character notice effect is higher in the “pseudo-ream” than in the “non-pseudo-ream”. In step S586, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR9-3 for determining the third mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the third mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the third mini character notice effect (whether or not to appear) is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “appearance”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  In addition, the fourth mini character notice setting table for determining the presence or absence of the fourth mini character is divided into a table at the time of “probable change”, a table at the time of “normal big hit”, and a table at the time of “disconnection”. Is provided. In the mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “appear” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “appearance”, respectively. It should be noted that since the determination value is not assigned to “appearance” at the time of “normal big hit”, the fourth mini character does not appear when the normal big hit occurs. In step S586, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR9-4 for determining the fourth mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the fourth mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the fourth mini character notice effect (whether or not to appear) is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “appearance”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  In addition, the fifth mini character notice setting table for determining the presence / absence of the fifth mini character is provided with a table other than “sliding”, a table when “slipping out”, and a table when “sliding big hit”. ing. In these mini character notice setting tables, the notice effect “none”, the mini character notice effect “appearance”, and the mini character notice effect “premiere appearance” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none”, “appearance”, and “premier appearance”, respectively. “Premier appearance” means that the appearance of the fifth mini character is a special aspect different from “appearance”. For example, if the mode in which butterflies that are the fifth mini characters fly on the screen of the effect display device 9 is “appearance”, the mode in which a large group of butterflies fly is “premier appearance”. Since a determination value is not assigned to “Premier Appearance” when it is other than “Slip Jackpot”, the fifth mini-character does not appear when it is other than “Slip Jackpot”. In step S586, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR9-5 for determining the fifth mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the fifth mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the fifth mini character notice effect (whether or not to appear) is determined based on the notice effect (“None”, “Appearance”, “Premier Appearance”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. .

  In addition, the sixth mini character notice setting table for determining the presence or absence of the sixth mini character is provided with a table for “other than intro” and a table for “intro”. In the mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “appear” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “appearance”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability (appearance probability) of the sixth mini character notice effect is higher in the case of “intro” than in the case of “other than intro”. In step S586, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR9-6 for determining the sixth mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the sixth mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the sixth mini character notice effect (whether or not to appear) is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “appearance”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. In this embodiment, when the variation pattern executes “intro” as a specific effect, the second step-up notice is executed with a probability of 100%.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the effect blade accessory notice effect using the effect blade accessory notice setting table shown in FIG. 101 (step S587). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) of the production blade role announcement effect are determined using the production blade role advance notice setting table, and in the case of a big hit, the production blade role announcement setting table for the big hit is used. Determine the content of the object notice effect.

  In this embodiment, the effect blade role notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by operating the effect blade features 79a and 79b at a predetermined timing. That is to say, the effect vane effect notice effect is not a notice effect that causes the effect feather features 79a and 79b to operate once or a plurality of times. The specific details of the effect feather notice announcement will be omitted.

  The effect blade accessory notice setting table shown in FIG. 101 is provided with a table at the time of losing and a table at the time of a big hit. In each effect blade accessory notice setting table, the notice effect “None” and the effect blade accessory notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the effect blade accompaniment notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In step S587, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR8-7 for determining the effect blade accessory notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the effect blade accessory notice setting table. To do. Then, based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value, the presence / absence of the effect blade accessory notice effect is determined.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the separately determined first step-up notice effect and second step-up notice effect can be combined (step S588).

  In this embodiment, the simultaneous execution of the notice effect D in the first step-up notice effect and the notice effect Z in the second step-up notice effect is prohibited. Because, in this embodiment, when the notice effect Z in the second step-up notice effect is executed, a background image representing the second step-up notice effect is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. In this case, the notification effect “first step-up notification effect” executed in the first system notification region at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed. D ”cannot be executed (the character corresponding to the notice effect D cannot appear on the display screen). Therefore, when the production mode of “A → B → C → D” is determined as the production mode of the first step-up notice production, the production “X → Y → Z” is produced as the production mode of the second step-up notice production. The mode must not be determined.

  As described above, when the notice effect D in the first step-up notice effect and the notice effect Z in the second step-up notice effect are executed simultaneously, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be combined. (N of step S588). And the process which changes (rewrites) the production | generation aspect of a 1st step-up notice effect, for example to "D-> C" etc. which lowered step up by the predetermined step is performed (step S589). When it is determined that the combination is impossible, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect to, for example, an effect mode “Z → Y” in which the step-up is lowered by one or more steps is executed. You may do it.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid duplication of two step-up notice effects executed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and notice by executing two notice effects simultaneously on the display screen. Display complexity can be avoided.

  Next, the CPU 101 for effect control includes the first step-up notice, the combination of the second step-up notice effect and the mail notice effect, and the combination of the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice effect and the card notice effect. It is determined whether or not it is possible (step S590). In this embodiment, since the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice effect, the mail notice effect, and the card notice effect are all executed on the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 9, the step-up notice effect and This is because other notice effects (e-mail notice effect, card notice effect) may not be executed simultaneously.

  Specifically, the e-mail notice effect or the card notice effect cannot be executed during the period in which the effect that the screen is turned off during the notice effect Y in the second step-up notice effect is executed. Therefore, when the effect of turning off the screen in the middle of the notice effect Y in the second step-up notice effect and the mail notice effect or the card notice effect overlap, it is determined that the combination is impossible. If it is determined that the combination is not possible (N in step S590), the screen displays a notice effect Y (off) that does not execute the mail notice effect or the card notice effect or turns off the screen in the second step-up notice effect. A process of changing (rewriting) to the notice effect Y that does not turn off is executed (step S591).

  It should be noted that the execution period of the notice effect Y (extinguishment) and the execution period of the other system liquid crystal notice effect do not overlap, so in step S590, it is possible to combine the second step-up notice effect and the other system liquid crystal notice effect. Does not judge. Moreover, since the movable object notice effect is executed by moving the movable member 78 around the effect display device 9, a step-up notice executed on the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 9 at any timing. It can be performed simultaneously with production. Therefore, the movable object notice effect can be combined with any effect form in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect. Therefore, in step S590, it is not determined whether or not a combination of the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and the movable object step-up notice effect is possible.

  The presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect aspect determined as described above are stored (set) in a predetermined storage area (notice effect storage area) of the ROM in the effect control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S840) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S841). When the process timer times out (step S842), the process data is switched (step S843). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (step S844). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data set next (step S845).

  Next, in step S845, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) is executed according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data or the like). Is confirmed (step S846). When the step-up notice effect is being executed (Y in step S846), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the switching timing of the step-up notice effect based on the contents of the process data (step S847). If it is the step-up notice effect switching timing (Y in step S847), the effect control CPU 101 follows the contents of the process data (particularly, display control execution data including the notice effect, lamp control execution data, and movable member control data). The step-up notice effect is switched (changed, developed) (step S848).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation button 120 can be operated (button effective period) (step S849). The operation button 120 is effective when the notice effects E and F and the mail notice effect in the first step-up notice effect are being executed. When the button is valid (Y in step S849), the effect control CPU 101 executes a process of detecting whether or not the operation button 120 is turned on (pressed) (step S850). The on state of the operation button 120 is detected by inputting an on signal from the operation button 120. When the effect control CPU 101 detects that the operation button 120 is turned on (Y in step S850), the effect control CPU 101 executes the effect corresponding to the operation button 120 being turned on in the set button notice effect (notice effect E, F, email notice). (Step S851).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the movable object notice effect (movable object step-up notice effect) based on the contents of the process data (movable member control data and the like) (step S852). If it is the execution timing of the movable object notice effect (Y in step S852), the movable member 78 is operated according to the contents of the process data (particularly, movable member control data) to execute the movable object notice effect (step S853).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of the other notice effects (frame notice effect, mini character notice effect, effect blade accessory notice effect, other system liquid crystal notice effect) based on the contents of the process data. (Step S854). If it is the execution timing of other notice effects (Y in step S854), other notice effects are executed according to the contents of the process data (step S855). That is, the frame lamp 28 is turned on in a predetermined lighting pattern, a mini character image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 at a predetermined timing, the effect blades 79a and 79b are operated, the effect display device 9 An image (an image of another system) different from an image used for other effects is displayed on the screen.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S856), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S858). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S857), the process proceeds to step S858. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop variation.For example, a variation pattern command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is received. Even in such a case, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern including non-ream PA (non-reach PA1-5, normal PA2-4, super PA3-4, super PA3-5, super PA3-9, super PA3-10, super PB3-4, super PB3-5, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-5, Super PA4-9, Super PA4-10, Super PA5-4, Super PA5-5, Super PB4-4, Super PB4-5, Super PB5-4, Super In the case of executing the processing of steps S841 to S845 based on PB5-5, special PG1-3, PG1-5, and special PH1-3, PH1-5), as described above, a plurality of effect symbols are simulated. Display control of the effect display device 9 is executed so that the fluctuation is executed. In other words, effect control data indicating the effect of the pseudo-continuous is also set in the process table corresponding to the pseudo-continuous variation pattern.

  Next, the execution timing (notification timing) of various notice effects will be described. FIG. 104 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of various notice effects. As shown in FIG. 104, the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the mail notice (a kind of button notice), the card notice, the other system liquid crystal notice, and the mini character notice are images displayed on the effect display device 9. Since these are notices to be used, these notices are called liquid crystal notices.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the first step-up notice is a main step-up notice (“A → B →”) that steps up in the order of step (A) to step (B), step (C), and step (D). C → D ”) and branch step up notice (“ A → E → F ”branching to branch step (E) without going from step (A) to step (B) and then to step (F) )), The process proceeds from step (A) to step (B), branches to step (G) in the middle of step (B), and then branches to step up notice ("A → B (on the way) → G → H ”), the process proceeds from step (A) to step (B), branches to step (G) in the middle of step (B), and further branches to step (I). Branch step up And a notice ( "A → B (middle) → G → I"). Here, steps (A) to (I) indicate the stage (period) in which the notice effects A to I are being executed.

  In this embodiment, the branching step (F) is a step (button notice) executed in response to the operation of the operation button 120 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the operation button 120 during the execution of the step (E), the process proceeds to the step (F) to open a predetermined effect (the box shown in FIGS. 74, 77, etc.). Production to show the contents).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the second step-up notice shifts from the step (X) to the suggestion effect, branches to the branch step (Y) in the middle of the suggestion effect, and then shifts to the step (Z). Step-up advance notice (“X → suggesting effect → Y → Z”), transition from step (X) to suggestion effect, branching to branch step (Y) in the middle of suggestion effect, and in the middle of branching step (Y) The screen is turned off, and a step-up advance notice (“X → impact production → Y (screen turned off) → Z”) that shifts to step (Z) after the screen is turned off is provided. Here, steps (X), (Y), and (Z) indicate stages (periods) in which the notice effects X, Y, and Z are being executed.

  In this embodiment, after the step (X) is executed, the suggestive effect is always executed. The suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that step (Y) is executed after step (X) is executed, and specifically, the display screen of effect display device 9 gradually disappears. Production. Since the suggestion effect has a function of leaving the afterglow of the executed step (X), the suggestion effect is also referred to as an afterglow display.

  104 notifies the player that the mail has been received, prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, opens the mail in accordance with the operation of the player's operation button 120, and The contents (message shown in FIG. 92 and the like) are notified, and the possibility of a big hit is recognized according to the contents of the mail.

  In addition, the card notice effect shown in FIG. 104 automatically notifies the contents (message shown in FIG. 96, etc.) written on the card after displaying the card, and the probability of a big hit depending on the contents is high or low. Recognize

  In this way, the mail notice effect is a notice effect (button notice effect) that displays a message (such as “...” “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 92, etc.) in accordance with the operation (pressing down) of the operation button 120 by the player. On the other hand, the card notice effect is a notice that automatically displays a message (such as “...” “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 96, etc.) without depending on the operation (pressing down) of the operation button 120 by the player. Production. In addition, the effect which displays a photographed image (moving image) in the effect display apparatus 9 is performed after execution of the card notice effect.

  In addition, the other system liquid crystal notice shown in FIG. 104 may be a big hit by displaying a predetermined image (an image different from the image displayed in the other liquid crystal notice) on the screen of the effect display device 9. Is recognized by the player.

  The mini character notice shown in FIG. 104 causes the player to recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by causing the mini character to appear on the screen of the effect display device 9 (for example, skipping a butterfly) at the start of the change of the effect symbol. . As described above, there are six types of mini characters.

  In addition, the movable object notice shown in FIG. 104 causes the player to recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by changing the moving image mode of the movable member 78 in stages. As described above, the movable object notice is a step-up notice effect (movable object step-up notice effect) in which the movable member 78 operates for each of steps K, L, and M.

  In addition, the effect feather effect notice effect shown in FIG. 104 is that there is a possibility of a big hit by causing the effect blade effect 79a, 79b to operate (activate) at three times during the change of the effect symbol. Make people aware. In this embodiment, when the effect blades 79a and 79b are operated, a light emitter such as a light emitting diode (not shown in FIGS. 1 and 3) built in the effect blades 79a and 79b is caused to emit light. Production (light effect) is performed. In this embodiment, the effect blade bonus notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but may be a step-up notice effect. For example, the operation of the first effect blade accessory 79a, 79b in the effect blade accessory notice effect is set as step (P), and the operation of the second effect blade accessory 79a, 79b is set as step (Q). The operation of the effect blades 79a and 79b is defined as step (R). And the production | generation aspect which complete | finishes at step (P), the production | generation aspect which transfers to step (Q) after execution of step (P), it transfers to step (Q) after execution of step (P), and then step (R) ) To provide a production mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify step by step of the possibility of a big hit even by the effect blade accessory notice effect.

  In addition, the frame notice effect (frame flash notice effect) shown in FIG. 104 causes the player to recognize the possibility of a big hit by lighting the frame lamp 28 with a lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern at the time of normal fluctuation. Note that, as shown in FIG. 104, the frame notice effect is executed not only when the change of the effect symbol starts but also when the button notice (email notice) is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 104, among the plurality of notice effects, the mini character notice effect and the frame notice effect (frame flash) are the notice effects that can be started simultaneously with the start of the variation of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. . Of the plurality of notice effects, the first step up notice effect, the mail notice effect, the card notice effect, the other system liquid crystal notice effect, the movable object notice effect (movable object step up notice effect), and the production blade feature notice effect ( The feather mono notice effect) is a notice effect that can be executed when the change of the effect symbol is shifted to the high speed change. Among the plurality of notice effects, the second step-up notice effect and the movable object notice effect are notice effects that can be executed at a time after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change of the effect design to the high speed change. ing. Further, among the plurality of notice effects, the second step up notice effect is a notice effect that can be started during the time when the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol is being executed (timing later than the first step up notice effect, etc.) Has been.

  Thus, since the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are started at different timings, it can be expected that the notice will be started for each of the plurality of step-up notice effects. . That is, if the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are started at the same timing, when neither the first step-up notice effect nor the second step-up notice effect is started at that timing, There is a risk that the expectation of the big hit will be lost and the interest of the game may be reduced, but if the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are configured to start at different timings, Even if the step-up notice effect is not started, an expectation that the second step-up notice effect may be started can be given, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating.

  Further, among the plurality of notice effects, the start timing of the mini character notice effect and the frame notice effect (frame flash), the start timing of the first step-up notice effect, etc., and the start of the second step-up notice effect and the movable object notice effect Since the timings are different from each other, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not the notice effect will be started at three start timings, and to further enhance the interest of the game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 104, the first step-up notice effect is started first, and then the second step-up notice effect is started, but the reverse may be possible. That is, the second step-up notice effect may be started first, and then the first step-up notice effect may be started thereafter. Also, the start timing of other notice effects other than the step-up notice effect is not limited to the timing shown in FIG. 104, and can be changed as appropriate.

  In the example shown in FIG. 104, symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol. When “chance eye” is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed after the middle symbol aori effect (the effect of whether or not the middle symbol stops at the symbol that constitutes the chance eye) is performed. Is done.

  In the example shown in FIG. 104, the following effects are performed as slip effects. For example, after the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, the character appears, and after the right symbol is changed again, the effect is displayed (character sliding) to change the right symbol. In addition, after temporarily displaying the left symbol and the right symbol, the effect blades 79a and 79b are operated, and the left symbol, the right symbol, or the left and right symbols are re-fluctuated, and then the temporary symbol is displayed. An effect display to be changed (production blade accessory actuating slip) is performed. Also, after temporarily stopping the left and right symbols, the left symbol, right symbol, or left and right symbols are changed again according to the stop of the left symbol, right symbol, or left and right symbols. The effect display (specific symbol stop slip) for changing the temporary stop symbol is performed by displaying the stop symbol after stopping.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, the notice effect G in the second branch step-up can be branched at the same timing as the change from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the main step-up. is there. In this case, the notice effect G in the second branch step-up is executed in synchronization with the timing of the change from the notice effect A in the main step up to the notice effect B, and then the notice effect H (the notice effect H1 in the second branch step up). , H2) or the notice effect I (notice effects I1, I2) in the second branch step-up is executed.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 104, the variation of the effect symbol between when the main step-up (notice effects A to D) is executed and when the first branch step-up (notice effects A, E, F) is executed. Starting from the same timing in time (that is, as shown in FIG. 104, in the first step-up notice effect, both notice effects A to D and notice effects A, E, and F are noticed) Stage A starts from the same timing), the period from the start of the main step up (the first notice stage A) to the change to the notice stage B in the main step up, the first branch step up (the first The period from the start of the notice effect A) to the change to the notice effect E based on the branch system in the first branch step-up is substantially the same. That is, as shown in FIG. 104 (and FIG. 77), the notice effect E in the first branch step-up branches from the notice effect A in synchronization with the timing of changing from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the main step-up. . As in the first branch step-up shown in FIG. 77, the notice effect G in the second branch step-up shown in FIG. 78 is also notified in synchronization with the timing of changing from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the main step-up. Branch from production A.

  Here, “the period is substantially the same” is not limited to the case where the period is completely the same, and it is sufficient that the player can recognize that it is the same period, and the level (degree) that the player cannot recognize that it is a different period. Are included in the “substantially the same period”. In the example shown in FIG. 104, the period from the start of the main step-up (notice effect A) to the change to the notice effect B in the main step-up and the start of the first branch step-up (notice effect A). Even if there is a time difference from the period until the notice effect E of the branch system in the first branch step-up is changed, each period is substantially the same.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 104, when executing the main step-up (notice effects A to D) and the second branch step-up (notice effects A, B, G, H or notice effects A, B, G, I). ) Is started from the same timing in the variation time of the effect symbol (that is, as shown in FIG. 104, in the first step-up notice effect, when the notice effects A to D are executed and the notice effect A) , B, G, H or when the notice effects A, B, G, I are executed, the notice effect A is started from the same timing), and the main step-up (the first notice effect A) is started. A period for executing the notice effect A in the main step-up (for example, a period from the start of the notice effect A to the end of the notice effect A) and a second branch step-up (the first notice effect A) The period for executing the notice effect A in the second branch step up after the start (for example, the period from the start of the notice effect A to the end of the notice effect A) is substantially the same, and the notice in the second branch step up As an effect of the next stage of the effect A, an effect similar to the notice effect B of the next stage of the notice effect A based on the normal system is executed halfway, and then changed to the notice effect G based on the branch system. That is, as shown in FIG. 104 (and FIG. 78), the notice effect G in the second branch step-up branches while the notice effect B in the main step-up is being executed.

  Here, “the period is substantially the same” is not limited to the case where the period is completely the same, and it is only necessary that the player can recognize that it is the same period, and the level (degree) that the player cannot recognize as a different period. Are included in the “substantially the same period”. In the example shown in FIG. 104, the period from the start of the main step up (notice effect A) to the end of the notice effect A in the main step up is the main step up and the branch step up (first branch step up, first step 2 branch step-up).

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S870). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S877. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S876. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in steps S871 to S876. Without execution, the process proceeds to step S877.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag indicating that the effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing to stop changing the effect symbol is received. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S871). If the confirmation command reception flag is set, control is performed to stop and display the determined stop symbol (out-of-line symbol or jackpot symbol) (step S872).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the effect symbol in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, but the variable time timer has timed out. Based on that, the effect design may be stopped and displayed.

  When the jackpot display symbol is not displayed in the process of step S872 (that is, when the loss symbol is displayed), the effect control CPU 101 changes the value of the effect control process flag to the process of waiting for the variation pattern command (step S800). Is updated to a value corresponding to (step S874).

  When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S872, the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S876) and receives a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S876) indicating that the jackpot start designation command has been received. Whether or not a big hit start 1 designation command reception flag or big hit start 2 designation command reception flag) or a sudden start designation command reception flag indicating that a sudden start designation command has been received is set (step S877). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the sudden start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S878), and selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect. (Step S879).

  When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the sudden start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag. Also, in the process of step S879, the effect control CPU 101 selects the process table corresponding to the “15-time open game start notification” shown in FIG. When the big hit is determined, the process table corresponding to the “twice-open game start notification (dedicated to surprise)” shown in FIG. 58 is selected. Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S880), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control) In accordance with data 1, the production device (production display device 9 as production component, various lamps as production component, speaker 27 as production component, movable member 78 as production component and production blade accessory 79a, 79b ) Is executed (step S881). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S882).

  Next, specific examples of various notice effects will be described.

  First, main step-up (notification effects AD) in the first step-up notice will be described. FIG. 106 is a timing chart showing the notice timing when notice effects A to D are executed as the first step-up notice. The example shown in FIG. 106 shows a pattern in which a notice effect A → B → C → D is executed as the first step-up notice and a reach (super reach) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 106, the left symbol is stopped and the right symbol is stopped while the notice effect C is being executed, and the reach effect is executed after the notice effect D is executed.

  FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example when the notice effects A to D are executed as the first step-up notice. As shown in FIG. 107, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 107 (10-1)), when the start condition is satisfied, In the first system notice area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (see the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9: see FIG. 112) As the notice effect A in the first step-up notice, an effect in which the character A210 appears from the right side of the screen is executed (10-2). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen.

  Next, an effect in which the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen is executed as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (10-3). Thereafter, the character B211 goes to the right side of the screen. Next, an effect in which the character C212 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is executed, and the left symbol (“7”) is stopped (10-4). Thereafter, the character C212 leaves on the right side of the screen.

  Thereafter, an effect in which characters A210, B211 and C212 appear from the left of the screen at the same time is executed as a notice effect D in the first step-up notice, and the right symbol (“7”) is stopped to generate reach (10-5). ).

  The effect as described above is the notice effect of the main step up in the first step up notice.

  Next, the first branch step up (notification effects E and F) in the first step up notice will be described. FIG. 108 is a timing chart showing the notice timing when notice effects A, E, and F are executed as the first step-up notice. The example shown in FIG. 108 shows a pattern in which a notice effect A → E → F is executed as a first step-up notice and a reach (super reach) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 108, the left symbol is stopped while the notice effect F is being executed, and then the right symbol is stopped and the reach effect is executed.

  FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example when the notice effects A, E, and F are executed as the first step-up notice. As shown in FIG. 109, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 109 (11-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the production symbol is started, the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation, and the character A210 appears from the right side of the screen as the announcement effect A in the first step-up notice in the first system notice area of the display screen of the effect display device 9. An effect to be executed is executed (11-2). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen.

  Next, the box image 300 and the operation button image 310 are displayed in the vicinity of the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 without performing the effect in which the character B211 corresponding to the notice effect B in the first step-up notice appears. The effect to be executed is executed (11-3). This effect corresponds to the notice effect E (branch step E) in the first branch step-up. By executing the notice effect E, the player is prompted to operate the operation button 120.

  When the player operates the operation button 120, the box image 300 is opened, and an effect is shown to show that a gold bullion is in the box, and the left symbol (“7”) is stopped (11−). 5). This effect corresponds to the notice effect F (branch step F) in the first branch step-up. It should be noted that the items in the box are not limited to displaying gold ingots, but display any one of a plurality of types of items (for example, items such as jewels and bills) depending on the type of reach and the reliability of the jackpot. It may be. Further, it may be notified that nothing is contained in the box (empty) according to the type of reach and the reliability of the jackpot. In such a configuration, it is necessary to perform processing for selecting the contents of the box according to the type of reach and the reliability of the jackpot.

  Thereafter, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs (11-5).

  The effects as described above are the notice effects E and F in the branch step-up.

  Next, the second branch step-up (notification effects G and H) in the first step-up notice will be described. FIG. 110 is a timing diagram showing a notice timing when notice effects A, B, G, and H are executed as the first step-up notice. The example shown in FIG. 110 shows a pattern in which a notice effect A → B → G → H is executed as a first step-up notice and a reach (super reach) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 110, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and the reach effect is executed while the notice effect H is being executed.

  FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example when the notice effects A, B, G, and H are executed as the first step-up notice. As shown in FIG. 111, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 111 (12-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the production symbol is started, the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation, and the character A210 appears from the right side of the screen as the announcement effect A in the first step-up notice in the first system notice area of the display screen of the effect display device 9. An effect to be executed is executed (12-2). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen.

  Next, an effect in which the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen is executed as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (12-3). Then, during the execution of the notice effect B (that is, before the character B211 moves to the right of the screen), an effect in which a sound such as “Go Go Go” is played is executed (12-4). This effect corresponds to the notice effect G (branch step G) in the second branch step-up.

  Then, an effect that an earthquake occurs and the ground shakes and the ground breaks is executed (12-5). This effect corresponds to the notice effect H1 (branch step H1) in the second branch step-up. The left symbol (“7”) is stopped during the announcement effect H1. After that, “Mole” comes out from the ground, and an effect of “It ’s super reach!” Is executed (12-6). This effect corresponds to the notice effect H2 (branch step H2) in the second branch step-up. During execution of the notice effect H2, the right symbol ("7") is stopped and the reach effect is executed.

  The effects as described above are the notice effects G, H1, H2 in the second branch step-up.

  Next, the second branch step-up (notification effects G and I) in the first step-up notice will be described. FIG. 112 is a timing diagram showing the notice timing when notice effects A, B, G, and I are executed as the first step-up notice. The example shown in FIG. 112 shows a pattern in which a notice effect A → B → G → I is executed as a first step-up notice and a reach (super reach) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 112, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and the reach effect is executed during the notice effect I.

  FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example when the notice effects A, B, G, and I are executed as the first step-up notice. As shown in FIG. 113, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 113 (13-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the production symbol is started, the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation, and the character A210 appears from the right side of the screen as the announcement effect A in the first step-up notice in the first system notice area of the display screen of the effect display device 9. The effect to perform is executed (13-2). Thereafter, the character A210 goes to the right of the screen.

  Next, an effect in which the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen is executed as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (13-3). Then, while the notice effect B is being executed (that is, before the character B211 is left on the right side of the screen), an effect in which a sound such as “go-go-go” is sounded is executed (13-4). This effect corresponds to the notice effect G (branch step G) in the second branch step-up.

  Then, the effect of generating lightning is executed (13-5). This effect corresponds to the notice effect I1 (branch step I1) in the second branch step-up. The left symbol (“7”) is stopped during the execution of the notice effect I1. Thereafter, an effect that displays “Chance!” Is executed (13-6). This effect corresponds to the notice effect I2 (branch step I2) in the second branch step-up. During execution of the notice effect I2, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and the reach effect is executed.

  The effects as described above are the notice effects G, I1, and I2 in the second branch step-up.

  Next, a display operation example of the effect during reach will be described. FIG. 114 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the effect during reach or the like. As shown in FIG. 114 (A), when the reach effect of normal reach is executed, the variation of all the effect symbols is started, the variation of the effect symbol becomes a high-speed variation, and the left symbol and the right symbol are sequentially stopped. After reaching the reach state, reach production of normal reach is executed. Here, the reach effect of normal reach is, for example, an effect in which the sound of “reach” is output from the speaker 27 without displaying a character image on the effect display device 9. Thereafter, the middle symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 114 (B), when the reach effect of super reach is executed and there is no effect during reach, all effect symbols start to change, and the effect symbol changes to high speed change. Thus, after the left symbol and the right symbol are sequentially stopped to reach the reach state, the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and the reach effect of super reach such as displaying the character image is executed. Thereafter, the middle symbol is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (C), when the reach production of the super reach is executed and the development production is executed, the variation of all the production symbols is started, and the variation of the production symbols becomes the high-speed fluctuation. Thus, after the left symbol and the right symbol are sequentially stopped to reach the reach state, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped, and the reach / losing combination is temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the middle symbol is changed again, and the reach production of super reach is executed. Thereafter, the middle symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 114 (D), when the reach effect of super reach is executed and the advance notice during reach is executed, the change of all the effect symbols is started and the change of the effect symbols is changed at high speed. The left symbol and the right symbol are sequentially stopped to reach the reach state, and then the reach notice is executed. Thereafter, the reach production of super reach is executed. Thereafter, the middle symbol is stopped.

  As shown in FIGS. 114C and 114D, the timing at which the development effect is executed overlaps with the timing at which the advance notice during reach is executed. As shown in FIG. 114 (B), when the reach effect is not executed in super reach, the reach effect of normal reach is executed.

  FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example in which an effect during reach is executed. In the variable display based on the variation pattern to reach, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, the change of the effect design is started, as shown in FIG. 115 (B). Thus, in the left and right symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbol (here, “7”) is stopped and the reach state is reached.

  Here, if the variation pattern of the reach of the normal reach is shifted, as shown in FIG. 115 (C4), the final stop symbol determined in step S506 of FIG. 62 is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the development pattern is a super reach variation pattern (N in step S926 in FIG. 68 or step S930 in FIG. 68), the reach of normal reach is shown in FIG. 115 (C1). After the effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), the reach effect of super reach is executed. Thereafter, according to the variable display result, for example, as shown in FIG.

  In addition, when it is determined to execute the development effect of “development after temporary stop—1” in step S929 in FIG. 68 as a variation pattern of super reach, as shown in FIG. 115 (C2), the left and right symbols are displayed. The effect design (here “6”) minus the effect design (here “7”) in the display areas 9L and 9R is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), the middle symbols re-variate, and as shown in FIG. 115 (E), the reach effect of super reach is executed. Then, according to the variable display result, for example, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), the final stop symbols constituting the reach-removed combination are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the development pattern “super development after temporary stop + 1” is executed in step S929 in FIG. 68 as a variation pattern of the super reach, the left and right symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 115 (C3). The effect symbol (here, “8”) obtained by adding 1 to the effect symbol (here “7”) in the areas 9L and 9R temporarily stops in the symbol display area 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), the middle symbols re-variate, and as shown in FIG. 115 (E), the reach effect of super reach is executed. Thereafter, according to the variable display result, for example, as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example in the case where the advance notice during reach is executed as the effect during reach. In the variable display based on the variation pattern that becomes the super reach, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, the variation of the effect design is started, and in FIG. 116 (B). As shown, in the left and right symbol display areas 9L and 9R, the effect symbol (here, “7”) is stopped and the reach state is reached.

  Here, if it is determined in step S913 in FIG. 67 that the advance notice during reach is executed, and the reach advance notice pattern of reach advance notice A is determined in step S918, for example, as shown in FIG. Reaching advance notice is executed for causing the effect display device 9 to display the character image CH1 corresponding to the intermediate notice A. Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (D), the reach effect of super reach is executed. Thereafter, according to the variable display result, for example, as shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S913 in FIG. 67 that the advance notice during reach is to be executed, and the reach advance notice pattern of reach advance notice B is determined in step S918, for example, as shown in FIG. Reaching advance notice for causing the effect display device 9 to display the character image CH2 corresponding to the advance notice B is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), the reach effect of super reach is executed. Thereafter, according to the variable display result, for example, as shown in FIG. 116 (H), the final stop symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example in the case where the pseudo continuous variation is executed three times. Corresponding to the fluctuation pattern being super PA3-5, PA3-10, PB3-5, PA4-5, PA4-10, PA5-5, PB4-5, PB5-5, PF1-1, pseudo-continuous fluctuation When it is executed three times, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), the variation of the effect symbol is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), all effect symbols are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), an effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (the first pseudo-variable change) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), all effect symbols are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (E), effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (the second pseudo-variation change) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117 (F), all effect symbols are stopped (temporarily stopped). Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (G), effect display is performed in which the effect symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable third time) in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117 (H), the effect symbols “6” are displayed together in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, and are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). The variable display state becomes the reach state. Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (I), the reach effect of super reach is executed, and according to the variable display result, for example, as shown in FIG. 117 (J), the symbols “left”, “middle” and “right” are displayed. In the display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the effect symbols of “6” are stopped and displayed together, so that the final stop symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed.

  As described above, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed three times, it is determined that the super reach is achieved. In this case, since the effect during reach is not executed, the useless effect can be prevented and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the development effect is an effect that reinforces the player's expectation by making it appear that it has evolved from normal reach to super reach. However, since the ratio of normal reach is low when the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is a predetermined number or more (in this embodiment, when the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is 3, ), The production effect of the development effect that appears to have evolved from normal reach to super reach is reduced. That is, if the development effect is executed even though it is known that the super-reach is caused by the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the useless effect is executed. Accordingly, in this embodiment, the development effect is not executed when the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Thereby, useless production can be omitted and the interest of the game is improved.

  Similarly, when the gaming state is a probability variation state or a high base state, and the total number of reserved memories is 4 or more, the occurrence rate of normal reach is low in order to shorten the average variation time. Thus, when the occurrence rate of normal reach is low, the effect of the development effect is low. In other words, if the development effect is executed when the occurrence rate of normal reach is low, most of the normal reach will be developed into super reach, so the player can predict the effect. End up. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the occurrence rate of normal reach is low, the development effect is not executed. Thereby, useless production can be omitted and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the setting of the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 70, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the ratio determined to execute the development effect than when the variable display result is “losing”. Is high. With such a setting, when the game state is a normal state or the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is less than a predetermined number, the player can feel the expectation of the player by the development effect, and the player becomes the development effect. Attract attention and improve the fun of the game.

  Further, in the setting of the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 70, when the variable display result is “lost”, the pattern “progress after temporary stop + 1” is more easily determined than “development after temporary stop−1”. ing. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the pattern of “development after provisional stop + 1” is more easily determined than “development after provisional stop + 1”. With this setting, the reliability of “big hit” when the development effect “progress after temporary stop-1” is executed is higher than when the development effect “progress after temporary stop + 1” is executed. can do. Thereby, since the ratio which becomes a specific display result changes with the production | presentation aspect (development production pattern) of a development effect, a player comes to pay more attention to a development effect and the interest of a game improves.

  In this embodiment, the reach notice during reach and the development effect can be executed as the effect during reach. However, the execution timing of these effects is the same. Therefore, when the advance notice during reach is executed (Y in step S902), the development effect is not executed (step S904). In this way, it is possible to notify that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit by executing the advance notice during reach, and it is possible to prevent the production from overlapping with the production and to prevent the content of the production from becoming unclear .

  Further, in the setting of the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 70, the determination ratio of the development effect pattern is different between the case of the reach effect α and the case of the reach effect β. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to which development effect is executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132K shown in FIGS. 13A to 13G and FIGS. 14A to 14E, and reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. In the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in 134C and FIG. 16, the normal reach is determined depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, and depending on the total number of reserved memories. The ratio determined by is different. According to such a configuration, depending on which predetermined condition (probability change state, short time state, total number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than a predetermined number), the ratio of the big hit when normal reach is executed differs. Therefore, the player comes to pay attention to the reach production, and the interest of the game is improved. In this embodiment, when the variable display result is “losing”, normal reach is executed by changing the ratio determined as normal reach depending on whether or not the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. However, even if the variable display result is a “big hit” other than the fourth probability change or suddenness, it depends on whether or not the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. The ratio determined for normal reach may be varied. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit” other than the fourth probability variation and the sudden probability, if the total reserved storage number is 4 or more, it may be less likely to be determined as normal reach than when it is less than 4.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first step-up notice effect is a step-by-step notice effect, a main step-up notice that can execute the notice effects A to D, and the main step-up notice is being executed. At this stage, without changing to the next stage notice effect (the notice effect B in the above embodiment), the notice effect E for notifying that there is a possibility of a big hit depending on the operation of the operation button 120 by the player. , F (operation notice effect) branching step up notice effect is included, so that the step up notice effect can be provided with variations (diversity), and the entertainment of the game can be improved. Further, since the notice effect after branching is the operation notice effect, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  The effect control CPU 101 changes to the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect when it is determined to be a big hit, and the effect that the notice ends without changing to the notice effect C (“A → B”). ) Is selected (reliability “about 0.3819” in the case of “step B” shown in FIG. 90), the notice effect B is not changed after the notice effect A is executed in the branch step-up notice effect. In the case of “Steps E, F” shown in FIG. 90, the reliability “ Using the first notice setting table set so as to be higher than about 0.4124 "), the aspect of the effect in the first step-up notice effect is determined. According to such a configuration, the branch step-up notice effect (notice effects E and F) is executed in the main step-up notice effect rather than the case where the notice effect B is executed next to the notice effect A. Since the possibility of a big hit is higher, the player operates the operation means with great expectation when the player branches off, and can further improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 replaces the notice effect B with the notice effect B at the same timing as the change from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect. ) Is executed, the player does not know which notice effect (the notice effect B, the notice effect E, F) changes from the notice effect A, and the interest of the game is improved. Can do.

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice effect includes a special step-up notice effect (second step-up notice effect) different from the main step-up notice effect and the branch step-up notice effect. As the step-up notice effect, the main step-up notice effect and the special step-up notice effect (second step-up notice effect) are configured so that they can be executed simultaneously during the same period during variable display. It is possible to improve the interest by simultaneously executing the notice effects (main step-up notice effect and special step-up notice effect).

  In this embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number based on the determination result of whether or not to reach the jackpot determination determination result, and the variation A variation pattern is determined from among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type using a random number for pattern determination. Then, if it is determined to be reach, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the reach state, and a variation pattern with a plurality of types of reach included in the variation pattern type according to the reach state is determined. Decide either. Further, when it is determined not to reach, one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types corresponding to the non-reach state is determined, and a plurality of types of reach included in the variation pattern type corresponding to the non-reach state are accompanied. Determine any of the fluctuation patterns. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects not only when reaching the reach state but also when not reaching the reach state without increasing the program capacity.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 101 is determined to be a big hit, the notice effects E and F (operation notice effects) are executed without changing to the notice effect B after the notice effect A is executed in the branch step-up notice effect. In the main step-up notice effect, the selection ratio (the reliability “about 0.4124” in the case of “steps E and F” shown in FIG. 90) in which the effect mode (“A → E → F”) is selected is selected. The selection rate (“Step C” shown in FIG. 90) is selected as a reliability “about 1.1” that changes to the notice effect B and further changes to the notice effect C (“A → B → C”). 8933 ") is set to be higher, and the aspect of the effect in the first step-up notice effect is determined using the first notice setting table. According to such a configuration, the possibility of a big hit is higher when the main step-up notice effect is executed up to the notice effect C than when the branch step-up notice effect (notice effects E and F) is executed. Therefore, the player has greater expectations for the continuation (step-up) of the main step-up notice effect than branching to the branch step-up notice effect, and can maintain a sense of expectation over a long period of time, It is possible to further improve the interest of games.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to branch to the notice effects E and F in the branch step-up notice effect at the same timing as the change from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect. The player can expect to change to the notice effect B at the same timing and continue or branch to the notice effects E and F at the same time, and can further improve the interest. In the above-described embodiment, it is configured to branch to the notice effects E and F in the branch step-up notice effect at the same timing as the change from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect. However, it may be configured to branch to the notice effects E and F in the branch step-up notice effect at the same timing as the change from the notice effect B to the notice effect C in the main step-up notice effect. Also, the notice effects E, F or the notice effects G, H, and I at the same timing as the timing when the notice effect A changes from the notice effect B to the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect. It is also possible to branch to at least one branch notice effect.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to branch to the notice effect G in the branch step up at a timing during which the notice effect B in the main step up notice effect is being executed. During the execution of the notice effect B in the notice effect, not only the transition to the next notice effect C can be expected, but also the transition (branch) to the notice effect G in the branch step-up can be expected. Can be achieved. In addition, you may make it branch to the notice effect E and F (1st branch notice effect) in the timing in the middle of performing the notice effect A in the main step-up notice effect. In addition, the notice effect E, F (first branch notice effect) or notice effect G, H, I (second branch notice effect) at the timing when the notice effect A or the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect is being executed. ) May be branched to at least one branch notice effect.

  The first step-up notice effect is a main step-up notice effect and a first branch timing (a timing when the notice step effect A changes to the notice effect B), which is a stage in the middle of the execution of the main step-up notice effect. First branch step for branching to different notice systems E and F (first branch notice effects) different from the notice effects A to D included in the main step-up notice effect without changing to the next stage notice effect B Up notice effect C and the next stage notice effect C at the second branch timing (timing while notice effect B is being executed) after the first branch timing, which is in the middle of executing the main step up notice effect. Without changing to, the notice effects G, H or G, I (second minute) of a different system different from the notice effects A to D included in the main step-up notice effect The second branch step-up notice effect that branches to the notice effect) can be included, so that the variation of the notice effect can be increased and the player can be interested in the branch step-up notice effect. Improvements can be made.

  Further, when it is determined that the effect control CPU 101 is a big hit, the selection ratio (FIG. 90) in which the effect mode (“A → E → F”) in which the first branch step-up notice effect is executed is selected. The mode of the effect in which the second branch step-up notice effect is executed (“A → B → G → H or A → B → G”) than the reliability in the case of the branch steps E and F shown in FIG. → The selection ratio (I) is selected (reliability “about 2.8516” in the case of branch steps G and H shown in FIG. 90 or reliability “about 5.1464” in the case of branch steps G and I). Since the first notice setting table is set so as to be higher, the effect of the effect in the first step-up notice effect is determined. Jackpot trust Because of the high, it is possible to maintain the expectation for that branch long time, can be improved even more interest.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 branches to the notice effects E and F (first branch notice effect) at the same timing as the change from the notice effect A to the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect, and the main step up notice effect. Is divided into the notice effects G, H, and I (second branch notice effect) at a timing during the execution of the notice effect B. According to such a configuration, there are a plurality of branch timings branched from the main step-up notice effect, and the branch timing is synchronized with the change timing (switching timing) of the notice effect in the main step-up notice effect, and the main step-up notice. Since there is a case where the notice effect in the effect is being executed, the player can expect to change to the notice effect B at the same timing and continue or branch to the notice effects E and F at the same time. At the same time, during execution of the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect, not only can the transition to the next notice effect C be expected, but also the transition (branch) to the notice effect G in the branch step up can be expected. Further enhancement of interest can be achieved. It should be noted that at the timing during which the notice effect A in the main step-up notice effect is being executed, the notice effects E and F (first branch notice effect) are branched, and the notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect is changed to the notice effect C. The notice effects G, H, and I (second branch notice effect) may be branched at the same timing as the change timing. That is, the notice effects E and F (first branch notice effect) or the notice effect at the same timing as the timing when the notice effect A changes to the notice effect B or the notice effect B changes to the notice effect C in the main step-up notice effect. Branch to any one of G, H, I (second branch notice effect) and notice effect at a timing during which notice effect A or notice effect B in the main step-up notice effect is being executed You may make it branch to the other branch notice effect of E, F (1st branch notice effect) or notice effect G, H, I (2nd branch notice effect).

  Also, the first step-up notice effect is the main step-up notice effect and the main step-up notice effect is not changed to the next step notice effect (notice effect B) in the middle of the execution of the main step-up notice effect. A branch step-up notice effect branching to another notice effect G, H (branch notice effect) different from the notice effects A to D included in the notice effect, and a stage in the middle of execution of the branch step-up notice effect Special branch step-up notice effect branching to a different notice system I (special branch notice effect) different from the branch notice effect G, H included in the branch step-up notice effect without changing to the next stage notice effect H As a result, the variation of the notice production becomes abundant, and you can be interested in the branch of the step-up notice production. It is possible to improve the flavor.

  In the above embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 refers to the first notice setting table shown in FIGS. 86 to 88 and collectively determines the notice pattern at the time of each variation of the pseudo-series. Thereby, the control load of the gaming machine 1 (the processing load for determining the notice effect) can be reduced.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In the above embodiment, the advance notice during reach is to display the character image on the effect display device 9, but means for giving notice from the player's viewpoint (display (background or character image), sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) Any means may be used as long as a notice is given using. Further, when the advance notice during reach is executed using each of the display, sound, lamp, and movable object, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on which means is used. Further, when the advance notice during the reach is executed by combining a plurality of means, the reliability that is a big hit may be varied depending on which combination is used. Note that these are not limited to the effect during reach, and the same applies to other notice effects.

  Further, in the above embodiment, execution of the development effect is limited when the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is equal to or greater than a predetermined number or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, but the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is predetermined. The execution of the development effect may be limited only when the number is greater than or equal to the number or only when the predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, if the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is a predetermined number or more, or the predetermined condition is that the probability variation state is established or the high base state is established, the execution of the development effect is limited. May be. Further, when the execution of the development effect is restricted, it may not be executed completely, and the execution rate may be lowered.

  In addition, as the predetermined condition, when any of the probability variation state, the high base state, and the total number of stored storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the production symbol is temporarily stopped during the reach, and then re-variable, The execution ratio of the effect that develops to super reach may be higher than the development effect that develops to super reach without temporarily stopping the effect symbols.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 15A, when the total reserved memory number is “0”, the reach HA2-1 can be determined, and the total reserved memory number is When it is “1” to “3”, it can be determined as reach HA 2-2, and when the total number of reserved memories is “4” or more, it can be determined as reach HA 2-. As shown in FIG. 16A, the ratio determined as normal reach (normal CA2-1 variation pattern type) increases in the order of reach HA2-3> reach HA2-2> reach HA2-1. It was. The ratio determined as normal reach (normal CA2-1 variation pattern type) is not limited to this, and may be increased in the order of reach HA2-1> reach HA2-2> reach HA2-3. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the appearance ratio of normal reach when a predetermined condition (the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more) is established. In this case, the determination ratio of the normal reach in the reach HA2-3 may be extremely lower than the determination ratio of the super reach (super CA2-2, CA2-3 variation pattern type) (for example, normal reach). May not be determined).

  Further, when the variable display result is “losing”, the ratio determined as normal reach according to the total number of reserved storages by setting the reach determination table shown in FIG. 15 or the reach variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. Was different. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is “losing”, the normal reach determination ratio is constant regardless of the total number of reserved memories, and if the variable display result is “big hit”, is the probability changing state? If either of the following conditions is met, that is, the high base state or the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the ratio determined for normal reach is reduced and which condition is met The ratio determined as normal reach may be varied depending on whether or not it is.

  In addition, when the variable display result is “big hit” and when the variable display result is “losing”, it is in a probable variation state or in a high base state, or the total number of pending storage is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. If either condition is satisfied, the ratio determined for normal reach may be lowered, and the ratio determined for normal reach may be varied depending on which condition is satisfied.

  Also, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or higher than the predetermined number, the normal reach is made lower than when the total reach is equal to or higher than the predetermined number. It may be. Specifically, when it is determined as N in step S922 in FIG. 68, it is determined whether or not the total reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. If the total reserved memory number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S926. It is determined that there is no development effect, and if the total reserved storage number is less than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S925 to determine whether or not to execute the development effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the advance notice and other advance notice effects are determined by the effect control CPU 101 on the effect control board 80 side, and are determined on the main board 31 side. Then, a command that can specify the determined content may be transmitted to the effect control board 80.

  Further, the development effect in the above embodiment is an effect of temporarily stopping an effect symbol obtained by +1 or -1 in the effect symbol display area 9C, but a specific effect symbol (for example, in the effect symbol display area 9C) A chance symbol or a gigantic symbol different from a symbol indicating a number) may be temporarily stopped. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on which symbol is temporarily stopped.

  In the above embodiment, the presentation control board 80 has been described as specifying the gaming state based on the display result designation command. However, based on the variation pattern designation command, the jackpot start designation command, and the jackpot end designation command. Thus, the gaming state may be specified. In addition, a command for specifying the gaming state may be transmitted, and the gaming state may be specified by the command.

  In the above-described embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice during reach using the reach advance notice determination table 301 shown in FIG. 69A, and the reach advance notice pattern determination table 302 shown in FIG. Used to determine the notice pattern during reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence / absence of the advance notice during reach and the advance notice pattern during reach may be determined in one process using one table.

  Further, in the reach notice determination table 301, the presence or absence of the reach notice is determined at a different ratio depending on whether the variable display mode is “super reach lose” or “big hit”. The presence / absence of the advance notice during reach may be determined based on the variable display result, the jackpot type, the variation pattern, and the like. In the reach notice pattern determination table 302, the reach notice pattern is determined at a different rate depending on whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit”. Further, the reach advance notice pattern may be determined based on the jackpot type, the variation pattern, or the like.

  In the embodiment described above, the presence / absence of execution of the development effect and the development effect pattern are determined using the development effect determination table 303 shown in FIG. 70. The effect pattern may be determined in two or more steps by another table. In the development effect determination table 303, whether or not the development effect is executed and the development effect pattern are determined at different ratios depending on whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”. These may be determined based on the variable display mode, jackpot type, variation pattern, and the like.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the first step-up notice in each fluctuation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is determined collectively by the first notice setting table shown in FIGS. 86 to 88. The first step-up notice for each variation may be determined for each variation. Also in this case, when the notice effects E and F in the branch step up are executed as the notice effects at the first variation, the notice effects E and F in the branch step up are performed as the notice effects at the second variation. When the notice effect G, H in the branch step up is executed as the notice effect at the first change, the notice effect G, H in the branch step up is executed as the notice effect at the second change. It should just be comprised so that it may be easy. In this way, it is possible to diversify the change from one notice effect to another notice effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, reach is established for each notice effect in the first step-up notice (main step-up notice, first branch step-up notice, second branch step-up notice) and second step-up notice. Although it was a notice effect that was executed before, it may be a notice effect that is executed after the reach is established, or a notice effect that continues from before the reach is established to after the reach is established. For example, a notice effect that continues).

  In addition, it is preferable that each of the notices shown in the above-described embodiments can execute a plurality of kinds of notice modes (effect modes of notice effects) in the notice. For example, in the first step-up notice, the notice effect A includes a plurality of different kinds of notice effects A1, A2, A3... (For example, the color of clothes of the character A is different). Further, the movable object notice and the effect blade accessory notice include a plurality of different movable aspects (movable speed, movable range, number of movements, etc.) as the movable aspects of the movable member 78 and the effect blade accessory 79. In addition, button notifications include multiple types of display content (for example, "...", "chance", "super reach", etc., multiple types of different characters, display colors even if the display content is the same) Are different, etc.). In addition, the frame lamp notice includes a plurality of types of light emission modes (light emission speed, light emission color, etc.) as light emission modes. In addition, the mini character notice includes different appearances of different mini characters and different mini characters. The other-system liquid crystal preview includes a plurality of types of preview images (for example, seminar images and stag images) as the preview images displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Thus, any one of the production modes included in the predetermined notice is selected and executed. As a result, the notice effects are diversified, and the possibility of being a big hit can be varied depending on the effect mode by changing the execution ratio depending on which of the variable display results is.

  In the above embodiment, in the step-up notice, the execution rate of the notice and the notice mode (the notice effect) are determined depending on which fluctuation pattern is out of non-reach, normal reach, super reach, or big hit. The appearance rate is changed, but a notice setting table is provided for each variation pattern, and the notice value is changed according to the content of the probability change pattern. You may make it change a rate and the appearance rate of a notice aspect. For example, when the variation pattern executes a special effect such as pseudo-ream or sliding, the execution rate of the step-up notification or the appearance rate of a predetermined notification mode may be improved.

  In addition, in the notices other than the step-up notice, the presence / absence of the notice and the appearance rate of the notice form (effect form of the notice effect) are changed depending on whether or not it is a big hit. A plurality of different notice setting tables are provided, and a plurality of different allocations are determined according to the determination result of the pre-determining means (out-going or big hit, the type of big hit in the case of big hit) or the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means. Any one of the notice setting tables may be selected, and the notice form to be executed may be determined based on the selected table and the notice determination random number. By configuring in this way, depending on the type of jackpot when it is a big hit in advance, execution of each notice depending on whether it will reach even in the event of a loss, and whether it will develop into a super reach at the time of reach The rate and the appearance rate of the notice mode can be determined. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern executes a special effect such as pseudo-ream or sliding, it is possible to improve the notice execution rate and the appearance rate of a predetermined notice mode.

  In the above embodiment, the CPU 56 determines the type of the variation pattern using the type random number, and determines the variation pattern in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number. However, the effect control CPU 101 determines the type of the notice effect using the notice type random number, and determines the notice effect within the determined notice effect type using the notice effect determination random number. Also good. For example, it is impossible to simultaneously execute another system liquid crystal notice and a button notice executed at a later timing. This is because the other-system liquid crystal notice displays the notice image in the entire area of the display screen, so that the effect image of the button notice cannot be displayed when such a notice image is displayed. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether to perform the notice of another system liquid crystal notice or the button notice as the notice effect type by using a preliminarily provided notice type random number, and then determines the decided notice type. The mode of the notice effect included in is determined. According to such a configuration, selection of a combination of notice effects that cannot be executed simultaneously can be reliably avoided.

  Further, if the type of the notice effect is determined by using the random number, the type of the notice effect is determined based on the table corresponding to the type of the decided notice effect. While changing the appearance ratio (without changing the distribution value in the notice type table for determining the type of the notice effect), changing the appearance ratio of the notice effect form (in the notice setting table for determining the notice effect form) On the contrary, the appearance ratio of the type of the notice effect is changed (although the distribution value in the notice type table is changed), but the appearance ratio of the form of the notice effect is not changed (the notice setting table). It is possible to easily realize a design change such that the distribution value in (1) is not changed. As a result, when changing the type of the notice effect and the appearance ratio of the notice effect according to the model change etc., it is not necessary to change all the data (table distribution values), and some data ( It can be easily realized only by changing the notice type table or the setting value of the notice setting table (that is, it is not configured to determine the type of the notice effect after determining the type of the notice effect, When it is desired to change only the appearance rate of the production mode included in the type of the predetermined notice effect, or when it is desired to make the type of the given notice effect appear at a higher rate than the type of the other notice effect, the notice in each notice It is necessary to change all the contents of the table in which the aspect of production is set, and it is difficult to realize such a change). Since the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type random number and then the variation pattern included in the variation pattern type is determined, the same effect as the above case can be obtained. That is, the contents of the variation pattern determination table when only changing the appearance rate of the variation pattern included in the predetermined variation pattern type is desired or when it is desired to cause the predetermined variation pattern type to appear at a higher rate than other variation pattern types. Must be changed, and it is difficult to realize such a change.

  In each of the above embodiments, there may be a relationship between the two system step-up notices and the two special symbols. That is, the two system step-up notices may correspond to different special symbols. For example, the first step-up notice may be likely to appear during the change of the first special symbol, and the second step-up notice may be likely to appear during the change of the second special symbol.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine provided with two special symbol displays (the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b) as a variable display unit is taken as an example. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with a special symbol display.

  In addition, the game machine in which variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is executed in the order of winning based on the winning at the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14. However, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is preferentially executed. In order to do this, in step S52 of FIG. 28, it is determined whether or not there is “second” data in the reserved specific area, and if there is “second” data, the process proceeds to step S54. In step S55, the data may be read out.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to 100. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the normal step-up notice is executed in the first change in the notice setting table, the normal step-up is also performed in the second change and the third change. Although the notice is set to be executed, the branch step-up notice may be executed at the second change after the normal step-up notice is executed at the first change. Further, it may be configured such that a branch step-up notice is executed at the time of the third change, or a normal step-up notice may be executed.

  After setting a predetermined number of bets for one game for a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of the identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever. By operating the stop button provided in response to the above, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is stopped. When a winning is generated according to the display result that is sometimes derived and displayed, a predetermined game medium predetermined according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a predetermined game value is given to the player as a gaming state You may apply this invention to the game machine comprised so that it might be in the state to give. For example, if a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol are configured as effect symbols separately from the identification information by the variable display device, and a reach effect is performed with the effect symbols, can a given game value be given to the player? The invention of the present application (for example, the invention described in claims 1 to 6) can be applied when indicating whether or not.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 15 Variable winning ball apparatus 9a 1st decoration design display 9b 2nd decoration Symbol display 18c Total hold memory display 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
78 Movable members 79a, 79b Production vanes (a kind of movable members)
560 Microcomputer for game control 80 Production control board 100 Microcomputer for production control

Claims (2)

When a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on variable display means composed of a plurality of variable display units that variably display a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them and derive and display the display result. A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
In the variable display means, the identification information constitutes a part of the specific display result, but at least a part of the variable display unit performs a reach effect after reaching a reach state in which the identification information is variably displayed. Reach production execution means to execute,
The reach effect execution means can execute at least a first reach effect and a second reach effect that is executed via a predetermined effect after the first reach effect,
As the predetermined effect, the variable display means temporarily stops the identification information with a non-specific display result that is not the specific display result, and then resumes variable display of the identification information of some of the variable display units. A development effect, or a second development effect that performs variable display of the identification information of some of the variable display parts without temporarily stopping the identification information with a non-specific display result that is not the specific display result in the variable display means. Development production execution means to
The identification information in all of the plurality of variable display units after the variable display of the identification information is started in the variable display means and before reaching the reach state in which the reach effect is executed by the reach effect executing means. Re-variable display executing means for executing re-variable display for restarting variable display after temporarily stopping display with the non-specific display result,
Further comprising
The reach effect executing means executes the second reach effect via the predetermined effect after the first reach effect when the revariable display is executed a predetermined number of times or more by the revariable display executing means. ,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein when the revariable display is executed a predetermined number of times or more by the revariable display executing means, the development effect executing means executes the second extended effect as the predetermined effect. Pre-decision means for deciding whether to control to the specific gaming state before derivation display of the display result;
Notice effect execution means for executing a notice effect for notifying that the display result of variable display in the variable display means may be the specific display result;
A notice effect determining means for determining whether to execute the notice effect based on the determination result of the prior decision means;
Further comprising
The notice effect execution means executes the notice effect at a timing overlapping with the timing at which the development effect execution means executes the first development effect,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the development effect executing means does not execute the first development effect when the notice effect is executed by the notice effect execution means.

Images